To see the other types of publications on this topic, follow the link: Community Renewal Program (New York, N.Y.).

Journal articles on the topic 'Community Renewal Program (New York, N.Y.)'

Create a spot-on reference in APA, MLA, Chicago, Harvard, and other styles

Select a source type:

Consult the top 50 journal articles for your research on the topic 'Community Renewal Program (New York, N.Y.).'

Next to every source in the list of references, there is an 'Add to bibliography' button. Press on it, and we will generate automatically the bibliographic reference to the chosen work in the citation style you need: APA, MLA, Harvard, Chicago, Vancouver, etc.

You can also download the full text of the academic publication as pdf and read online its abstract whenever available in the metadata.

Browse journal articles on a wide variety of disciplines and organise your bibliography correctly.

1

Putra, Randi Purnama, Wagino Wagino, Bahrul Amin, and Wanda Afnison. "Program Pelatihan Sistem Electronic Fuel Injection (EFI) Bagi Siswa SMK N 2 Payakumbuh." Suluah Bendang: Jurnal Ilmiah Pengabdian Kepada Masyarakat 21, no. 3 (November 1, 2021): 245. http://dx.doi.org/10.24036/sb.01610.

Full text
Abstract:
One of the mandatory criteria for SMK graduates is to have a competency renewal value. Competence values that lack novelty will be unable to compete in the current era of rapid technological development. The school has a big role in designing learning that has new value. To achieve this, the school must move quickly to present collaborative programs, training with other agencies that do have professionalism in their fields.The problems experienced by Vocational High Schools above are one of the responsibilities of lecturers as educators, wherefrom the threefold missions of Higher Education that must be implemented there are points of community service. The lecturer profession is obliged to do community service related to the problems that arise around it. Based on the problems experienced by Vocational Schools at the initial point, our community service team from the Automotive Engineering Department through LP2M UNP tried to cooperate with schools in presenting new competencies. This activity is in the form of Electronic Fuel Injection (EFI) fuel system training for students of SMK N 2 Payakumbuh.From the evaluation results, it was found that students' understanding of the fuel injection system (EFI) material increased with an average increase in understanding of 12-18%. The author believes that if this is continued consistently, it can have an impact on improving the quality of PBM in SMK N 2 Payakumbuh.
APA, Harvard, Vancouver, ISO, and other styles
2

Milgram, Gail Gleason. "An Analysis of Student Assistance Programs: Connecticut, New Jersey, and New York." Journal of Drug Education 28, no. 2 (June 1998): 107–16. http://dx.doi.org/10.2190/h62u-b31y-d8fr-q2m5.

Full text
Abstract:
A questionnaire, designed to determine the process for identifying and providing assistance to students who demonstrate a variety of problem behaviors that interfere with learning or co-curricular performance in school, was mailed to school superintendents ( N = 1526) in Connecticut, New Jersey, and New York. Four hundred and fifty-one responses (29.6%A) were received; the majority (84.7%) indicated that a formal written policy exists for helping students and most (82.5%) also have a formal written procedure. The assistance program, most frequently called student assistance, is predominantly found at high school level. A full-time student assistance counselor paid by the school district (43.2%) or a grant funded position (18.9%) conducts the program. Students in the three states use the services of the program for alcohol problems, drug problems, family problems, school behavior problems, academic problems, etc. The major referral sources to the assistance programs are teachers, guidance counselors, and the students themselves. The survey findings indicate that assistance programs for students in Connecticut, New Jersey, and New York play a significant role in helping students who are experiencing problems and also positively impact on the school and the community.
APA, Harvard, Vancouver, ISO, and other styles
3

Wallace, R., and M. T. Fullilove. "AIDS Deaths in the Bronx 1983–1988: Spatiotemporal Analysis from a Sociogeographic Perspective." Environment and Planning A: Economy and Space 23, no. 12 (December 1991): 1701–23. http://dx.doi.org/10.1068/a231701.

Full text
Abstract:
Patterns of AIDS deaths, in space and time, are examined for the populous Bronx section of New York City in view of the continuing massive destruction of housing and disruption of community which has affected the South Bronx since the early 1970s. Annual Bronx AIDS deaths are studied simultaneously in geographic space and in a dual ‘social variate’ space, and it is found that study of linked changes in each deeply illuminates patterns in both. This analysis reinforces a rapidly growing body of work which suggests control of AIDS in the United States, particularly prevention of a widespread and relentlessly rising heterosexual phase of the epidemic, may well prove impossible without a timely, general, and considerable program of reform and renewal for its disintegrating inner cities.
APA, Harvard, Vancouver, ISO, and other styles
4

Hottensen, Dory. "Bereavement: Caring for Families and Friends after a Patient Dies." OMEGA - Journal of Death and Dying 67, no. 1-2 (August 2013): 121–26. http://dx.doi.org/10.2190/om.67.1-2.n.

Full text
Abstract:
New York-Presbyterian Hospital/Weill Cornell Medical Center is a large academic medical center that provided minimal, if any, bereavement support to families and loved ones of patients who died in the hospital. A comprehensive bereavement program was developed and implemented which included sending condolence cards to family members and friends, follow-up phone calls to screen for complicated grief, individual counseling, bereavement support groups, community referrals, and an annual memorial service for families and staff to provide an opportunity for shared mourning during the grieving process.
APA, Harvard, Vancouver, ISO, and other styles
5

Reisberg, Barry, Yongzhao Shao, James Golomb, Isabel Monteiro, Carol Torossian, Istvan Boksay, Melanie Shulman, et al. "Comprehensive, Individualized, Person-Centered Management of Community-Residing Persons with Moderate-to-Severe Alzheimer Disease: A Randomized Controlled Trial." Dementia and Geriatric Cognitive Disorders 43, no. 1-2 (2017): 100–117. http://dx.doi.org/10.1159/000455397.

Full text
Abstract:
Background/Aims: The aim was to examine added benefits of a Comprehensive, Individualized, Person-Centered Management (CI-PCM) program to memantine treatment. Methods: This was a 28-week, clinician-blinded, randomized, controlled, parallel-group study, with a similar study population, similar eligibility criteria, and a similar design to the memantine pivotal trial of Reisberg et al. [N Engl J Med 2003;348:1333-1341]. Twenty eligible community-residing Alzheimer disease (AD) subject-caregiver dyads were randomized to the CI-PCM program (n = 10) or to usual community care (n = 10). Primary outcomes were the New York University Clinician's Interview-Based Impression of Change Plus Caregiver Input (NYU-CIBIC-Plus), assessed by one clinician set, and an activities of daily living inventory, assessed by a separate clinician set at baseline and at weeks 4, 12, and 28. Results: Primary outcomes showed significant benefits of the CI-PCM program at all post-baseline evaluations. Improvement on the NYU-CIBIC-Plus in the management group at 28 weeks was 2.9 points over the comparator group. The memantine 2003 trial showed an improvement of 0.3 points on this global measure in memantine-treated versus placebo-randomized subjects at 28 weeks. Hence, globally, the management program intervention benefits were 967% greater than memantine treatment alone. Conclusion: These results are approximately 10 times those usually observed with both nonpharmacological and pharmacological treatments and indicate substantial benefits with the management program for advanced AD persons.
APA, Harvard, Vancouver, ISO, and other styles
6

Tucker, Carolyn M., Tasia M. Smith, Guillermo M. Wippold, Nicole E. Whitehead, Tara A. Morrissette, Jaime L. Williams, Nwakaego A. Ukonu, Tya M. Arthur, Yvette M. Sealy, and Benjamin S. Crosier. "Impact of a University-Community Partnership Approach to Improving Health Behaviors and Outcomes Among Overweight/Obese Hispanic Adults." American Journal of Lifestyle Medicine 11, no. 6 (January 22, 2016): 479–88. http://dx.doi.org/10.1177/1559827615623773.

Full text
Abstract:
Objective. To examine the impact of a community-informed and community-based Health-Smart Church (HSC) Program on engagement in health promoting behaviors (healthy eating and physical activity) and health outcomes (body mass index, weight, and systolic and diastolic blood pressure). Design. A total of 70 overweight/obese Hispanic adults participated in an intervention group (n = 37) or a waitlist control group (n = 33) in 2 Hispanic churches in Bronx, New York. Results. Post-intervention the intervention group significantly increased in frequency of healthy eating and physical activity compared to the waitlist control group. Although no significant changes in body mass index or systolic blood pressure were found for either group, the intervention group decreased significantly in weight from pre-intervention to post-intervention. Conclusions. The results of the present study add to the growing body of literature evidencing the successful use of community-engaged and community-based participatory health promotion interventions with racial/ethnic minority populations and highlight important practices and considerations for similar health promotion interventions with these communities.
APA, Harvard, Vancouver, ISO, and other styles
7

Yeh, Ming-Chin, Wincy Lau, Zoey Gong, Margrethe Horlyck-Romanovsky, Ho-Jui Tung, Lin Zhu, Grace X. Ma, and Judith Wylie-Rosett. "Development of a Web-Based Diabetes Prevention Program (DPP) for Chinese Americans: A Formative Evaluation Approach." International Journal of Environmental Research and Public Health 20, no. 1 (December 29, 2022): 599. http://dx.doi.org/10.3390/ijerph20010599.

Full text
Abstract:
Increasing evidence demonstrates that an online Diabetes Prevention Program (DPP) can delay the onset of type 2 diabetes. However, little has been done for Chinese Americans. This study, using Community-Based Participatory Research and Intervention Mapping approaches, describes a formative research process in the development of a culturally and linguistically tailored online DPP program among Chinese Americans with prediabetes living in New York City. Using a triangulation approach, data were collected to inform the development of an online DPP curriculum through (1) a literature review, (2) three focus groups (n = 24), and (3) a community advisory board meeting among 10 key informants knowledgeable in community needs, diabetes care, and lifestyle interventions. Participants indicated online DPPs would be very useful and easily accessible. However, key barriers including low computer skills/literacy and technology self-efficacy were identified. In addition, taking meal photos and tracking pedometer steps daily were found to be acceptable self-motoring tools for sustaining a healthy lifestyle. Furthermore, the integration of features such as text message reminders and the creation of social support groups into the online DPP curriculum was proposed to minimize attrition. This theory-based formative research to develop a culturally and linguistically appropriate web-based DPP curriculum was well-received by Chinese Americans and warrants testing in future intervention studies.
APA, Harvard, Vancouver, ISO, and other styles
8

Ylvisaker, Mark, Timothy Feeney, and Melissa Capo. "Long-Term Community Supports for Individuals With Co-Occurring Disabilities After Traumatic Brain Injury: Cost Effectiveness and Project-Based Intervention." Brain Impairment 8, no. 3 (December 1, 2007): 276–92. http://dx.doi.org/10.1375/brim.8.3.276.

Full text
Abstract:
AbstractOutcome studies have established that successful community living is compromised in the population of individuals with traumatic brain injury and chronic behavioural difficulties along with a co-occurring diagnosis of substance abuse and/or mental health disorder. Two studies are presented. The first was aimed at describing long-term outcome of a sample of individuals (N = 51) served by the New York State Department of Health TBI Medicaid Waiver Program. Each of the participants was diagnosed with TBI plus either substance abuse or a mental health disorder, or both. Because of significant behavioural challenges, all of the participants were in a restrictive living setting the year before enrolment in the waiver program (e.g., nursing or correctional facility). Data on community living arrangement, self-reported community integration experiences, and costs are presented. Results indicate that most of the participants (41 of the 46 who were alive and living in state) continued to live in the community 8 to 9 years after commencement of community support services. The participants' community integration responses were generally positive and cost data demonstrate substantial savings to the state for this cohort. Comparing prewaiver costs in residential settings with most recent (2005) costs for community supports, there was an average daily cost savings of US$137 per person for the 1996 cohort and US$144 per person for the 1997 cohort. The second study explored the use of project-oriented interventions and supports in an agency that provides community support services to this dual diagnosis population. Project-oriented services are described as meeting many needs common to this dual-diagnosis population. Clinical staff (N = 11) and a sample of waiver participants (N = 7) were surveyed. Results suggest that the use of personally meaningful projects can become a clinical habit for staff and that projects are generally judged by participants to be a meaningful use of time, and significant in giving them an opportunity to play an expert role and to help others.
APA, Harvard, Vancouver, ISO, and other styles
9

Tucker, Frederick T. "SOCIOLOGICAL MEDIA: MAXIMIZING STUDENT INTEREST IN QUANTITATIVE METHODS VIA COLLABORATIVE USE OF DIGITAL MEDIA." Problems of Education in the 21st Century 73, no. 1 (October 25, 2016): 75–88. http://dx.doi.org/10.33225/pec/16.73.75.

Full text
Abstract:
College sociology lecturers are tasked with inspiring student interest in quantitative methods despite widespread student anxiety about the subject, and a tendency for students to relieve classroom anxiety through habitual web browsing. In this paper, the author details the results of a pedagogical program whereby students at a New York City community college used industry-standard software to design, conduct, and analyze sociological surveys of one another, with the aim of inspiring student interest in quantitative methods and enhancing technical literacy. A chi-square test of independence was performed to determine the effect of the pedagogical process on the students’ ability to discuss sociological methods unrelated to their surveys in their final papers, compared with the author’s students from the previous semester who did not undergo the pedagogical program. The relation between these variables was significant, χ 2(3, N=36) = 9.8, p = .02. Findings suggest that community college students, under lecturer supervision, with minimal prior statistical knowledge, and access to digital media can collaborate in small groups to create and conduct sociological surveys, and discuss methods and results in limited classroom time. College sociology lecturers, instead of combatting student desire to use digital media, should harness this desire to advance student mastery of quantitative methods. Key words: community college, digital media, sociological methods, transformative pedagogy.
APA, Harvard, Vancouver, ISO, and other styles
10

Hoffman, Neal D., Colleen Kelly, and Donna Futterman. "Tuberculosis Infection in Human Immunodeficiency Virus—Positive Adolescents and Young Adults: A New York City Cohort." Pediatrics 97, no. 2 (February 1, 1996): 198–203. http://dx.doi.org/10.1542/peds.97.2.198.

Full text
Abstract:
Objectives. Adolescents with human immunodeficiency virus (HIV) infection are at increased risk for tuberculosis (TB), underscoring the importance of early identification of TB infection. The goals of this study were to assess the factors associated with the completion of evaluations for TB in a cohort of HIV-positive adolescents and young adults and to describe the prevalence of Mycobacterium tuberculosis infection and adherence to antituberculous treatment regimens. Methods. A retrospective chart review was done for all HIV-positive adolescents and young adults, ages 13 to 21 years (n = 49), seen in a comprehensive care program from January 1991 through December 1992. Data collected included CD4 cell count, HIV clinical status, living situation, substance use history, and the completion of an annual evaluation for TB infection. The evaluation consisted of a tuberculin skin test (Mantoux test), using an intraepidermal injection of 0.1 mL of 5 tuberculin units of purified protein derivative (PPD) and a simultaneous Merieux multitest anergy panel. Chi-square analysis was used to assess the association between the completion of the evaluation for TB and both living status and substance use. Results. Thirty-one (63%) of 49 patients completed evaluations for TB. Of the 31 completed evaluations, 18 were assessed by clinic staff on site, and 13 were assessed by other medical or trained nonmedical observers through community networking efforts. Neither homelessness nor illicit substance use were factors in the completion of the evaluation. Six (19%) of the 31 patients had positive PPD skin test results. Three had medical histories and chest radiographs suggesting active TB, and all were hospitalized for at least 2 weeks. Two had positive cultures for M tuberculosis, although the third also responded clinically to antituberculous therapy. All three were otherwise asymptomatic for HIV infection, with only moderately depressed CD4 cell counts. All three were homeless and used crack cocaine. After the initial treatment as inpatients, none completed treatment within the prescribed time period. Conclusions. The completions of the evaluations for TB were greatly facilitated by community networking, but innovative strategies to enhance both screening and treatment programs, such as training youth service providers in the community to read PPD skin tests, expansion of directly observed therapy services, and youth-centered programs for housing and substance use, need further development. The high prevalence of TB in the cohort underscores the need for providers to increase efforts to identify cases of TB infection among adolescents and young adults and to incorporate HIV risk assessment, counseling, and testing into their practices routinely.
APA, Harvard, Vancouver, ISO, and other styles
11

Burnes, David, Jessica Hsieh, Clara Scher, Paula Zanotti, Chelsie O. Burchett, Jo Anne Sirey, and Mark Lachs. "WHAT DOES SUCCESS MEAN IN THE CONTEXT OF ELDER ABUSE INTERVENTION FROM THE PERSPECTIVE OF VICTIMS?" Innovation in Aging 3, Supplement_1 (November 2019): S864. http://dx.doi.org/10.1093/geroni/igz038.3173.

Full text
Abstract:
Abstract Adult protective services (APS) and other community-based agencies respond to hundreds of thousands of elder abuse cases each year in the United States; however, little is known about what constitutes success in the context of elder abuse response intervention. This study explored the meaning of elder abuse intervention success from the perspective of victims themselves toward the development of a victim-centric taxonomy of outcomes. Guided by a phenomenological qualitative methodology, this study conducted in-person, semi-structured interviews with a sample of elder abuse victims (n = 30) recruited from APS in the states of Maine, New York, and California, as well as a community-based elder abuse social service program in New York City. To enhance trustworthiness, two researchers independently analyzed transcript data to identify key transcript statements into themes. Outcomes of success were identified across broad domains related to the victim, perpetrator, victim-perpetrator relationship, family system, and home environment. Specifically, common themes represented outcomes related to victim safety, autonomy, social support, and state of mind; perpetrator independence and accountability; and victim-perpetrator separation. For decades, the field of elder abuse has struggled to understand how to define success in the context of community-based intervention from a client-centered perspective. The taxonomy developed in this study provides a comprehensive and conceptually organized range of successful outcomes to serve as infrastructure for the development of meaningful intervention outcome measures. This study represents one of the largest efforts to understand and integrate the perspectives and needs of victims into elder abuse intervention practice/research to date.
APA, Harvard, Vancouver, ISO, and other styles
12

Sirey, Jo Anne, Patrick J. Raue, Nili Solomonov, Clara Scher, Alexandra Chalfin, Paula Zanotti, Jacquelin Berman, and George S. Alexopoulos. "Community delivery of brief therapy for depressed older adults impacted by Hurricane Sandy." Translational Behavioral Medicine 10, no. 3 (June 2020): 539–45. http://dx.doi.org/10.1093/tbm/ibz145.

Full text
Abstract:
Abstract Older adults frequently under-report depressive symptoms and often fail to access services after a disaster. To address unmet mental health needs, we developed a service delivery program (SMART-MH) that combines outreach, assessment, and therapy and implemented it in New York City after Hurricane Sandy. This study aimed to examine the feasibility, effectiveness, and patients’ engagement of our brief psychotherapy (“Engage”). We predicted that Engage would result in reductions of depression, and that the benefits would be comparable to those of a historical comparison group who received Engage in a controlled experimental setting. A total of 2,831 adults (age ≥ 60) impacted by Hurricane Sandy were screened for depression. Assessments and therapy were conducted in English, Spanish, Cantonese, and Russian. Depressed individuals (PHQ-9 ≥ 10) who were not in treatment were offered Engage therapy in their native language at local senior center/nutrition sites. Twelve percent of the participants reported depression (N = 333). Of these 333 participants, 201 (60%) were not receiving treatment and 143 agreed to receive Engage therapy. Linear mixed-effects model showed that depression severity decreased significantly over time. More than two thirds had a five-point reduction in PHQ-9 scores and post-treatment scores ≤9. Post-hoc comparison of standardized slopes of change found patterns of depression reductions equivalent to Engage provided in a controlled setting. Partnerships to integrate mental health care into community settings can increase detection of mental-health needs and access to services in patients’ native language. Brief reward exposure-based psychotherapy delivered in the community can provide comparable benefits to those achieved in research settings.
APA, Harvard, Vancouver, ISO, and other styles
13

Khongouan, Waralak, and Putpannee Sitachitta. "Area Development Guidelines to Support the Open-Air Markets in Thammasat University, Rangsit Campus." Journal of Architectural/Planning Research and Studies (JARS) 10, no. 1 (August 7, 2022): 123–36. http://dx.doi.org/10.56261/jars.v10i1.12941.

Full text
Abstract:
Angel, S. et al. (Eds.). (1983). Land for housing the poor. Singapore: Select Books. Antaöv. A. (2007). Democracy to become reality: Participatory planning through action research. Habitat International, 31(3-4), 333-344. Archer, D. (2009). Social capital and participatory slum upgrading in Bangkok, Thailand. Unpublished Ph.D. Dissertation, Department of Land Economy, University of Cambridge. Asian Coalition for Housing Right [ACHR]. (2012). Comprehensive site planning: Transform community to better living place for all. Bangkok: Author. Boonyabancha, S. (2005). BMK going to scale with “slums” and squatter upgrading in Thailand. Environment and Urbanization, 17(1), 21-46. Boonyabancha, S. (2009). Land for housing the poor—by the poor: Experience from the BMK nationwide slum upgrading programme in Thailand. Environment and Urbanization, 21(2), 1-21. Brydon-Miller, M. et al. (2003). Why action research? Action Research, 1(1), 9-28. Community Organizations Development Institute [CODI]. (2003). โครงการบ้านมั่นคง: แผนยุทธศาสตร์การแก้ไขปัญหาที่อยู่อาศัย (พ.ศ. 2546-2550) [BMK: Strategic plan for slum upgrading (2003-2007)], Bangkok: Author. Community Organizations Development Institute [CODI]. (2010). บ้านมั่นคง [Baan Mankong]. Retrieved May 29, 2012, from http://www.codi.or.th/baanmankong/index.php?option=com_content&view=category&layout=blog&id=57&Itemid=10&lang=en Community Organizations Development Institute [CODI]. (2013). โครงการบ้านมั่นคง: พัฒนาการการแก้ไขปัญหาที่อยู่อาศัย [Baan Mankong Program: The evolution of housing development]. Retrieved March 14, 2013, from http://www.codi.or.th/baanmankong/index.php?option=com_content&view=category&layout=blog&id=57&Itemid=10&lang=en Davis, M. (2006). Planet of slums. New York: Verso. Forestor, J. F. (1989). The deliberative practitioner. Massachusetts: MIT Press. Frank, D. (2008). Sustainable housing finance for low-income groups: A comparative study. Berlin: Nomos Publishers. Friedmann, J. (1973). Retracking America: A theory of transactive planning. Los Angeles: Anchor Books. Gustavsen, B. (2008). Action research, practical challenges, and the formation of theory. Action Research, 6(4), 421-437. Healey, P. (1997). Collaborative planning: Shaping places in fragmented societies. Vancouver: University of British Columbia Press. International Institute for Environment and Development [IIED]. (2003). A decade of change: From the urban community development (UCDO) to the community organizations development institute (CODI) in Thailand, Working Paper 12 on Poverty Reduction in Urban Areas. Innes, J. (1996). Planning through consensus building: A view of the comprehensive ideal. Journal of the American Planning Association, 62(4), 460-472. Krumholz, N. & Forestor, J. F. (1990). Making equity planning work: Leadership in the public sector. Philadelphia: Temple University Press. Rabhibhat, A. (2007). รายงานวิจัยการประเมินผลโครงการบ้านมั่นคง เรื่อง คนจนเมือง: การเปลี่ยนแปลงโลกทัศน์และทัศนคติที่มีต่อตนเองและสังคม [The urban poor: The changes of social perspective and self reflection]. Unpublished Final Report submitted to Community Organization Development Institute. Sang-arun, N. (2012). The right to the city: The housing rights movement of Bangbua community. Journal of Architecture/Planning Research and Studies, 9(1), 1-12. Sapu, S. & Usavagovitwong, N. (2007). คู่มือการออกแบบและวางผังชุมชนโครงการบ้านมั่นคง: กรณีการสร้างชุมชนในภาคตะวันออกฉียงเหนือ [Community planning and design manual for Baan Mankong program: A case study of northeastern province]. Bangkok, Thailand: Community Organization Development Institute. Seabrook, J. (1996). In the cities of the south: Scenes from a developing world. London: Verso. Spatig, L. et al. (2010). The power of process: A story of collaboration and community change. Community Development, 41(1), 3-20. The Crown Property Bureau. (2010). รายงานประจำาปี พ.ศ. 2553 [Annual report 2010]. Retrieved March 12, 2013, from http://www.crownproperty.or.th/th/annual_report_2010.pdf The Crown Property Bureau. (2013). การพัฒนาชุมชนตามโครงการบ้านมั่นคง 39 ชุมชน [39 Communities: Baan Mankong program’s community development]. Retrieved March 12, 2013, from http://www.crownproperty.or.th/real_estate_02_06.php Turner, J. F. C. (1977). Housing by people: Towards autonomy in building environments. Michigan: Pantheon Books. UN-Habitat. (1997). Accommodating people in the Asia-Pacific region. Fukuoka: Author. UN-Habitat. (2012). Sustainable housing for sustainable cities: A policy framework for developing countries. Nairobi: Author. United Nations. (2008). Promotion and protection of all rights, civil, political, economic, social, and cultural rights, including the rights to development. Human Rights Council. Retrieved March 20, 2013, from http://www.internal-displacement.org/8025708F004BE3B1/(httpInfoFiles)/C90EE08CC6A733ABC12574C00049C81D/$file/G0810545.pdf Usavagovitwong, N. (2007). Towards community participation in housing design: Experience from low-income waterfront community, Bangkok. Journal of the Faculty of Architecture, KMITL, 5(1), 64-79. Usavagovitwong, N. et al. (2012). Understanding urban community amid capitalism: A case study of the Crown Property Bureau’s superblock. Journal of Architecture/Planning Research and Studies, 9(1), 27-42.
APA, Harvard, Vancouver, ISO, and other styles
14

KITLV, Redactie. "Book Reviews." New West Indian Guide / Nieuwe West-Indische Gids 62, no. 1-2 (January 1, 1988): 51–101. http://dx.doi.org/10.1163/13822373-90002046.

Full text
Abstract:
-Brenda Plummer, Carol S. Holzberg, Minorities and power in a black society: the Jewish community of Jamaica. Maryland: The North-South Publishing Company, Inc., 1987. xxx + 259 pp.-Scott Guggenheim, Nina S. de Friedemann ,De sol a sol: genesis, transformacion, y presencia de los negros en Colombia. Bogota: Planeta Columbiana Editorial, 1986. 47 1pp., Jaime Arocha (eds)-Brian L. Moore, Mary Noel Menezes, Scenes from the history of the Portuguese in Guyana. London: Sister M.N. Menezes, RSM, 1986. vii + 175 PP.-Charles Rutheiser, Brian L. Moore, Race, power, and social segmentation in colonial society: Guyana after slavery 1838-1891. New York; Gordon and Breach, 1987. 310 pp.-Thomas Fiehrer, Virginia R. Dominguez, White by definition: social classification in Creole Louisiana. Rutgers, New Jersey: Rutgers University Press, 1986. xviii + 325 pp.-Kenneth Lunn, Brian D. Jacobs, Black politics and urban crisis in Britain. Cambridge, London, New Rochelle, Melbourne and Sydney: Cambridge University Press, 1986. vii + 227 pp.-Brian D. Jacobs, Kenneth Lunn, Race and labour in twentieth-cenruty Britain, London: Frank Cass and Co. Ltd., 1985. 186 pp.-Kenneth M. Bilby, Dick Hebdige, Cut 'n' mix: culture, identity and Caribbean Music. New York: Metheun and Co. Ltd, 1987. 177 pp.-Riva Berleant-Schiller, Robert Dirks, The black saturnalia: conflict and its ritual expression on British West Indian slave plantations. Gainesville, Fl.: University of Florida Press, Monographs in Social Sciences No. 72. xvii + 228.-Marilyn Silverman, James Howe, The Kuna gathering: contemporary village politics in Panama. Austin, Texas: University of Texas Press, 1986. xvi + 326 pp.-Paget Henry, Evelyne Huber Stephens ,Democratic socialism in Jamaica: the political movement and social transformation in dependent capitalism. Princeton, N.J.: Princeton University Press, 1985. xx + 423 pp., John D. Stephens (eds)-Bridget Brereton, Scott B. Macdonald, Trinidad and Tobago: democracy and development in the Caribbean. New York, Connecticut, London: Praeger Publishers, 1986. ix + 213 pp.-Brian L. Moore, Kempe Ronald Hope, Guyana: politics and development in an emergent socialist state. Oakville, New York, London: Mosaic Press, 1985, 136 pp.-Roland I. Perusse, Richard J. Bloomfield, Puerto Rico: the search for a national policy. Boulder and London: Westview Press, Westview Special Studies on Latin America and the Caribbean, 1985. x + 192 pp.-Charles Gilman, Manfred Gorlach ,Focus on the Caribbean. 1986. Amsterdam/Philadelphia, John Benjamins., John A. Holm (eds)-Viranjini Munasinghe, EPICA, The Caribbean: survival, struggle and sovereignty. Washington, EPICA (Ecumenical Program for Interamerican Communication and Action), 1985.-B.W. Higman, Sidney W. Mintz, Sweetness and power: the place of sugar in modern history. New York: Elisabeth Sifton Books, Viking Penguin Inc., 1985. xxx + 274 pp.
APA, Harvard, Vancouver, ISO, and other styles
15

Ramirez, Neilia, Noel Santander, and Kim Guia. "Restoring the Sanctity and Dignity of Life Among Low-Risk Drug User Surrenderers." Bedan Research Journal 4, no. 1 (April 30, 2019): 116–35. http://dx.doi.org/10.58870/berj.v4i1.6.

Full text
Abstract:
The proponents of this research developed their interests to look into every good points a community-based relapse prevention program being implemented by a particular local community among low-risk drug-users surrenderers. This included appreciating the design of the program and how it impacted the participants and the community of Barangay Salapan, San Juan City. All these being viewed from the underlying principles of restorative justice, in the pursuit of describing how the sanctity and dignity of human life is being restored using the five stages of appreciative inquiry as method of analysis. The rehabilitation program being implemented by the local community and supported by the local government provided a silver lining for the victims of the prohibited drugs. Initially, it helped redeem their lost personal sense of dignity, social respect and acceptance, and become a productive and significant individual members of their particular families and their beloved community. It was emphasized that the restoration of the sanctity and dignity of life demands greater openness, volunteerism, respect sincerity and discipline from each of the persons involved in the rehabilitation program. It was noted also that all the sectors of the local community should be united and unselfishly support the program regardless of political color or affiliation, religious background, economic interests and social biases, so that the sacredness and dignity of life which is very primal as a value will be constructively attained. References Brabant, K. V. (2015). Effective advising in state building and peacebuilding contexts-how: appreciative inquiry. Geneva,International Peacebuilding Advisory Team Byron, W. (1998). The building blocks of catholic social teaching. AmericaCaday, F. (2017). Causes of drug abuse among college students: The Philippine experience. Ifugao State University, Philippines. The International Journal of Social Sciences and Humanities InventionCoghlan, A., Preskill, H. and Catsambas, T.T. An overview of appreciative inquiry in evaluation. Retrieved from http://www.rismes.it/pdf/Preskill.pdf.Cooperrider, D. and Whitney, D. (2005). A positive revolution in change: Appreciative inquiry. Case Western Reserve University, The Taos InstituteDangerous Drugs Board, Office of the President. (2016). Oplan Sagip, Guidelines on voluntarily surrenderer of drug users and dependents and monitoring mechanism of barangay anti-drug abuse campaigns. Board Regulation No. 4. Office of the President. Republic of the Philippines.Gómez, M.P.M., Bracho, C.A. and Hernández, M. (2014). Appreciative inquiry, a constant in social work. Social Sciences, SciencePublihing Group. Spain John Paul II. (1987). Solicitudo Rei Socialis. Libreria Editrice Vaticana Helliwell, J. F. (2011). Institutions as enablers of wellbeing: TheSingapore prison case study. British Columbia. University of British Columbia. International Journal of WellbeingHimes, K. (2001). Responses to 101 questions on social catholic teaching manwah. Paulist Press St. Columban’s Mission Society. Mazo, G. N., (2017). Transformational rehabilitation: Communitybased intervention to end the drug menace. International Journal of Research - Granthaalayah, 5(12), 183-190. https://doi.org/10.5281/zenodo.1133854.Morales, S.,Corpus, R. and Oliver, R. (2013). Appreciative inquiry approach on environmental stewardship on the issues of the West Philippine Sea. Polytechnic University of the Philippines. National Youth Congress 2013 of the PhilippinesMikulich, A. (2012). Catholic social thought and restorative justice. Jesuit Social Research InstitutePloch, A. (2012). Why dignity matters: Dignity and the right (or not) to rehabilitation from international and national perspectives. New York University Journal of International Law and Politics. New York University School of Law.Pope Francis. (2015). Laudato si. Vatican City. Leberia Editrice Vaticana.Sakai, K.(2005). Research on the trends in drug abuse and effective measures for the treatment of the drug abusers in asian countries an analysis of innovative measures for the treatment of drug abusers. Tokyo, Japan. United Nations Asia and Far East Institute (UNAFEI)Sanchez, Z.M. and Nappo, S.A. (2008). Religious intervention and recovery from drug addiction. Rev Saúde Pública. Universidade Federal de São Paulo. São Paulo, SP, BrasilSandu, A. and Damian, S. (2012). Applying appreciative inquiry principles in the restorative justice field. Romania. Lumen Publishing House.Shuayb, M., Sharp, C., Judkins, M. and Hetherington M. (2009). Using appreciative inquiry in educational research: possibilities and limitations. Report. Slough: NFER.Yip, P., Cheung, S.L., Tsang, S.,Tse, S., Ling, W.O., Laidler, K., Wong, P., Law, and F., Wong, L.(2011). A study on drug abuse among youths and family relationship. University of HongKong
APA, Harvard, Vancouver, ISO, and other styles
16

Hsieh, Jessica, David Burnes, Clara Scher, Paula Zanotti, Chelsie Burchett, Jo Anne Sirey, and Mark Lachs. "What Are the Most Distressing Aspects of Experiencing Elder Abuse? Findings From a Qualitative Study With Victims." Innovation in Aging 4, Supplement_1 (December 1, 2020): 327–28. http://dx.doi.org/10.1093/geroni/igaa057.1050.

Full text
Abstract:
Abstract Adult protective services and other community-based agencies respond to hundreds of thousands of elder abuse cases annually in the United States; however, few studies include elder abuse victims’ voices. This study explored the most distressing aspects of elder abuse, as identified by victims themselves; to date, this is the first known study on this topic. Guided by a phenomenological qualitative methodology, this study conducted in-person, semi-structured interviews with a sample of elder abuse victims (n = 30) recruited from a community-based elder abuse social service program in New York City. To enhance trustworthiness, two researchers independently analyzed transcript data to identify key transcript codes/themes. Distressing aspects of elder abuse were identified across three key domains, related to feelings of loss (50% of codes), threats/negative consequences (55%), and client-needs/system incongruity (14%). Specifically, the first theme represented outcomes related to loss of relationships (19% of ‘loss’ codes), personhood (16%), credibility (19%), faith/trust in others (38%), and finances (8%). The second theme looked at threats to physical self (34% of ‘threat’ codes), psyche (39%), and others, including the perpetrator (27%). The third theme focused on mismatches in client/system goals (50% of ‘incongruity’ codes) and legal system involvement (50%). The findings in this study provide a comprehensive and conceptually organized range of aspects to serve as infrastructure for the development of meaningful interventions to address the needs of victims. This study represents one of the largest efforts to understand and integrate the perspectives and needs of victims into elder abuse intervention practice/research to date.
APA, Harvard, Vancouver, ISO, and other styles
17

Akyar, Imatullah, J. Nicholas Dionne-Odom, and Marie A. Bakitas. "Using Patients and Their Caregivers Feedback to Develop ENABLE CHF-PC: An Early Palliative Care Intervention for Advanced Heart Failure." Journal of Palliative Care 34, no. 2 (June 28, 2018): 103–10. http://dx.doi.org/10.1177/0825859718785231.

Full text
Abstract:
Objective: Models of early, community-based palliative care for individuals with New York Heart Association (NYHA) class III/IV heart failure and their families are lacking. We used the Medical Research Council process of developing complex interventions to conduct a formative evaluation study to translate an early palliative care intervention from cancer to heart failure. Method: One component of the parent formative evaluation pilot study was qualitative satisfaction interviews with 8 patient–caregiver dyad participants who completed Educate, Nurture, Advise, Before Life Ends Comprehensive Heartcare For Patient and Caregivers (ENABLE CHF-PC) intervention. The ENABLE CHF-PC consists of an in-person palliative care assessment, weekly telehealth coaching sessions, and monthly follow-up. Subsequent to completing the coaching sessions, patient and caregiver participants were interviewed to elicit their experiences with ENABLE CHF-PC. Digitally recorded interviews were transcribed and analyzed using a thematic approach. Results: Patients (n = 8) mean age was 67.3, 62.5% were female, 75% were married/living with a partner; caregivers (n = 8) mean age was 56.8, and 87.5% were female. Four themes related to experiences with ENABLE CHF-PC included “allowed me to vent,” “gained perspective,” “helped me plan,” and “gained illness management and decision-making skills.” Recommendations for intervention modification included (1) start program at diagnosis, (2) maintain phone-based approach, and (3) expand topics and modify format. Conclusion: Patients and caregivers unanimously found the intervention to be helpful and acceptable. After incorporating modifications, ENABLE CHF-PC is currently undergoing efficacy testing in a large randomized controlled trial.
APA, Harvard, Vancouver, ISO, and other styles
18

Hasan, Rudi. "PENYELENGGARAAN PROGRAM SD-SMP SATU ATAP PADA DAERAH TERPENCIL DALAM LATAR BUDAYA RUMAH BETANG KALIMANTAN TENGAH." Equity In Education Journal 1, no. 1 (October 20, 2019): 11–19. http://dx.doi.org/10.37304/eej.v1i1.1547.

Full text
Abstract:
Abstract: The purpose of this study is to describe the implementation of the One-Roof Junior Secondary School as an alternative to the distribution of nine-year basic education in remote areas in the cultural setting of Central Kalimantan Betang Houses. This research is a qualitative research with a multi-site study design on 3 One-Roof Junior Secondary Schools in Gunung Mas Regency. Data collection is done by methods: in-depth interviews (indepth interview), participant observation (participant observation), and study documentation (study of document). Determination of data sources is done by using purposive sampling technique. Data analysis is done through the activities of organizing data, organizing and dividing data into units that can be managed, mensiteis, looking for patterns, find what is meaningful and what is researched to be decided and reported systematically (Bogdan and Biklen, 1998). Data analysis in this research was carried out in two stages, namely: data analysis for each site (single site) and cross-site data analysis. Checking the validity of the data is done by using a degree of credibility through both source and method triangulation techniques. The results of the study found that the values of the betang house culture that underlies the implementation of the One-Roof Junior Secondary School appeared on: (1) bureaucratic structure, including: SOP, coordination and empowerment of HR; (2) resources, including: human resources, infrastructure and financing; and (3) communication, including: internal communication, with supporting elementary schools, with related agencies, and the community around the school. Keywords: One-Roof Junior Secondary School, Remote Area, Betang House Culture Abstrak: Tujuan penelitian ini adalah mendeskripsikan penyelenggaraan program SD-SMP Satu Atap sebagai alternatif pemerataan pendidikan dasar sembilan tahun pada daerah terpencil dalam latar budaya rumah betang Kalimantan Tengah. Penelitian ini merupakan penelitian kualitatif dengan rancangan studi multi situs pada 3 SMPN Satu Atap di wilayah Kabupaten Gunung Mas. Pengumpulan data dilakukan dengan metode: wawancara mendalam (indepth interview), observasi partisipan (participant observation), dan studi dokumentasi (study of document). Penetapan sumber data dilakukan dengan teknik purposive sampling. Analisis data dilakukan melalui kegiatan mengorganisasi data, menata dan membagi data dalam unit-unit yang dapat dikelola, mensitesis, mencari pola, menemukan apa yang bermakna dan apa yang diteliti untuk diputuskan dan dilaporkan dengan sistematis (Bogdan dan Biklen, 1998). Analisis data dalam penelitian ini dilakukan dalam dua tahap, yaitu: analisis data tiap situs (situs tunggal) dan analisis data lintas situs. Pengecekan keabsahan data dilakukan dengan menggunakan derajat kepercayaan (credibility) melalui teknik triangulasi baik sumber maupun metode. Hasil penelitian menemukan bahwa nilai-nilai budaya rumah betang yang mendasari dalam penyelenggaraan SD-SMP Satu Atap muncul pada: (1) struktur birokrasi, meliputi: SOP, koordinasi dan pemberdayaan SDM; (2) sumberdaya, meliputi: SDM, sarana prasarana dan pembiayaan; dan (3) komunikasi, meliputi: komunikasi intern, dengan SD penyangga, dengan dinas terkait, dan masyarakat sekitar sekolah. Kata Kunci: SD-SMP Satu Atap, Daerah Terpencil, Budaya Rumah Betang References: Arikunto, S. (1998). Prosedur Penelitian: SuatuPendekatan Praktek. Jakarta: Rineka Cipta. Ary, D., Jacobs, L. C., & Razavieh, A.(2002). Introduction to Research in Education. Sixth Ed. Belmont, CA: Wadswort. Thomson Learning. Bogdan, R. C.,& Biklen, S.K.(1998). Qualitative Research For Educatio: An Introduction to Theory and Methods.Third Ed. Boston: Allyn and Bacon. Bollen, R. (1997). Making Good Schools: Linking School Effectiveness and School Improvement. London and New York: Routledge. Brienkerhoof, D. W.,& Crosby, L.B. (2002). Managing Policy Reform: Concept and Tool for Decision-Makers in Developing and Transitionong Countries. United States of America: Kumarian Perss, Inc. Castetter, W.B. (1996). The Human Resources Function in Educational Administration (Sixth Edition). New Jersey: Prentice Hall, Inc. Dunn, W. N. (1981). Public Policy Analysis: An Introduction. Englewood: Cliff, N.J. Prentice, Inc. Dwijowijoto, R. N. (2004). Komunikasi Pemerintahan. Jakarta: Elek Media Komputindo Kelompok Gramedia. Edward, G. (1980). Implementing Public Policy. Washington, DC. Congressional Quarterly, Inc. Glickman, C. D., Gordon, S. P., & Ross-Gordon, J. M. (2009). The Basic to Supervision and Instructional Leadership. Secon Ed, Boston: Pearson. Koehler. (1981). Organizational Communication, Behavioral Perspective. New York: Holt, Rinehart and Winston. Kratzer. (1996). Marketing the Nation. New York: Free Press. Kusni. J. J. (2006). Pergulatan Identitas Dayak Dan Indonesia: Belajar dari Tjilik RiwutPalangka Raya: Penerbit Galangpress. Mantja, W. (2002). Manajemen Pendidikan dan Supervisi Pengajaran (Kumpulan Karya Tulis Terpublikasi). Malang: Wineka Media. Mantja, W. (2008). Ethnography, Desain Penelitian Manajemen Pendidikan. Malang: Elang Mas. Nasution, S. (1998). Metode Penelitian Naturalistik Kualitatif Bandung: Transito. Peraturan Pemerintah RI Nomor47 Tahun 2008. Wajib Belajar. Bandung: Penerbit Citra Umbara. Robbins, S., P. (1998). Organizational Behavior. New Jersey: Englewood Cliffs. Sonhadji. K. H. A. (1996). Teknik Pengumpulam Data dan Analisis Data dalam Penelitian Kualitatif dalam Arifin. Penelitian Kualitatif. Malang: Kalimasahda Press. Sugiyono. (2006). Metode Penelitian Administrasi. Bandung: Alfabeta. Undang-Undang Dasar Republik Indonesia Tahun1945. Bandung: Penerbit Citra Umbara. Undang-Undang Republik Indonesia Nomor 20 Tahun 2003 tentang Sistem Pendidikan Nasional. 2006. Bandung: Pcnerbit Citra Umbara. Usop, K. M.A.(1994). Pakat Dayak: Sejarah Integrasi dan Jati Diri Masyarakat Dayak dan Daerah Kalimantan Tengah. Palangka Raya: Yayasan Dikbud Batang Garing. Winarno, B. (2002). Kebijakan Publik: Teori dan Proses. Yogyakarta: Media Pressindo.
APA, Harvard, Vancouver, ISO, and other styles
19

Irvine, Mary K., Bruce Levin, McKaylee M. Robertson, Katherine Penrose, Jennifer Carmona, Graham Harriman, Sarah L. Braunstein, and Denis Nash. "PROMISE (Program Refinements to Optimize Model Impact and Scalability based on Evidence): a cluster-randomised, stepped-wedge trial assessing effectiveness of the revised versus original Ryan White Part A HIV Care Coordination Programme for patients with barriers to treatment in the USA." BMJ Open 10, no. 7 (July 2020): e034624. http://dx.doi.org/10.1136/bmjopen-2019-034624.

Full text
Abstract:
IntroductionGrowing evidence supports combining social, behavioural and biomedical strategies to strengthen the HIV care continuum. However, combination interventions can be resource-intensive and challenging to scale up. Research is needed to identify intervention components and delivery models that maximise uptake, engagement and effectiveness. In New York City (NYC), a multicomponent Ryan White Part A-funded medical case management intervention called the Care Coordination Programme (CCP) was launched at 28 agencies in 2009 in order to address barriers to care and treatment. Effectiveness estimates based on >7000 clients enrolled by April 2013 and their controls indicated modest CCP benefits over ‘usual care’ for short-term and long-term viral suppression, with substantial room for improvement.Methods and analysisIntegrating evaluation findings and CCP service-provider and community-stakeholder input on modifications, the NYC Health Department packaged a Care Coordination Redesign (CCR) in a 2017 request for proposals. Following competitive re-solicitation, 17 of the original CCP-implementing agencies secured contracts. These agencies were randomised within matched pairs to immediate or delayed CCR implementation. Data from three 9-month periods (pre-implementation, partial implementation and full implementation) will be examined to compare CCR versus CCP effects on timely viral suppression (TVS, within 4 months of enrolment) among individuals with unsuppressed HIV viral load newly enrolling in the CCR/CCP. Based on current enrolment (n=933) and the pre-implementation outcome probability (TVS=0.54), the detectable effect size with 80% power is an OR of 2.75 (relative risk: 1.41).Ethics and disseminationThis study was approved by the NYC Department of Health and Mental Hygiene Institutional Review Board (IRB, Protocol 18–009) and the City University of New York Integrated IRB (Protocol 018–0057) with a waiver of informed consent. Findings will be disseminated via publications, conferences, stakeholder meetings, and Advisory Board meetings with implementing agency representatives.Trial registration numberRegistered with ClinicalTrials.gov under identifier: NCT03628287, V.2, 25 September 2019; pre-results.
APA, Harvard, Vancouver, ISO, and other styles
20

Rosenthal, Donald B. "From Nation to States: The Small Cities Community Development Block Grant Program. Edited by Edward T. Jennings, Dale Krane, Alex N. Pattakos, and B. J. Reed (Albany: State University of New York Press, 1986. viii, 258p. $44.50, cloth; $14.95, paper)." American Political Science Review 81, no. 3 (September 1987): 998–1000. http://dx.doi.org/10.2307/1962707.

Full text
APA, Harvard, Vancouver, ISO, and other styles
21

Formica, Margaret K., Sonali Rajan, and Nicholas Simons. "Healthcare indicators and firearm homicide: an ecologic study." Journal of Aggression, Conflict and Peace Research 11, no. 2 (April 8, 2019): 88–99. http://dx.doi.org/10.1108/jacpr-10-2018-0385.

Full text
Abstract:
Purpose The purpose of this paper is to investigate the relationship between rates of firearm homicide in New York State (NYS) and indicators of access to and quality of healthcare from 2011 to 2017. Design/methodology/approach Utilizing data from the NYS Division of Criminal Justice Services Uniform Crime Reporting Supplemental Homicide Reports and Robert Wood Johnson Foundation County Health Rankings Program, a county-level ecologic study was conducted, descriptive statistics provided and multivariable analyses conducted to determine the associations between critical indicators of county health and firearm homicide. Findings The majority of firearm homicide victims (n=2,619) were young, Black, men and the highest rates of firearm homicide were situated in urban centers. Subgroup analyses excluding large urban centers and controlling for key demographics illustrated that those counties with lower rates of clinicians were significantly associated with higher rates of firearm homicide. Research limitations/implications Despite challenges integrating two large data sets, the present findings were able to illustrate the critical relationship between access to healthcare and prevalence of firearm homicide. Practical implications The results of this study reinforce the importance of access to primary healthcare services and its relationship to critical health outcomes. Social implications In urban settings, firearm homicides disproportionately impact young Black men, who are among the least likely to have access to healthcare. In more rural areas, access to healthcare is related directly to improved health outcomes, including reduced rates of firearm homicides. Originality/value This is the first study to explore and subsequently establish the relationship between indicators of community health and firearm homicide in NYS.
APA, Harvard, Vancouver, ISO, and other styles
22

Parekh, Ankit, Bresne Castillo, Do Hyung Kim, Kathleen Black, Rafael de la Hoz, David Rapoport, Jag Sunderram, and Indu Ayappa. "401 Clinical Phenotypes of Obstructive Sleep Apnea in World Trade Center Responders." Sleep 44, Supplement_2 (May 1, 2021): A159—A160. http://dx.doi.org/10.1093/sleep/zsab072.400.

Full text
Abstract:
Abstract Introduction The heterogeneity of symptoms in obstructive sleep apnea (OSA) patients has been recently formalized into 3 distinct clusters: Sleepy, Disturbed Sleep, and Minimally Symptomatic. Our previous data showed that OSA is highly prevalent (>75%) in World Trade Center (WTC) responders, and positive airway pressure (PAP) treatment adherence is very poor (<20%). To better understand the heterogeneity of OSA in the WTC cohort, here we sought to examine the distribution of these distinct clinical phenotypes. Methods 643 subjects with no history of OSA or reported loud and frequent snoring before 9/11/2001 from the WTC health program clinical centers at Rutgers RWJMS, New Jersey, NYU School of Medicine, and Icahn School Medicine at Mount Sinai, New York underwent 2 nights of home sleep testing using the ARES unicorder (SleepMed, Inc., West Palm Beach, FL, USA). Epworth Sleepiness Scale (ESS), sleep onset insomnia, and sleep maintenance insomnia were assessed with questionnaires. OSA was defined as (AHI4%>=5 or RDI>=15/hr). The three clusters were defined as 1) Sleepy (ESS>10 and/or sleep onset/maintenance insomnia); 2) Disturbed Sleep (not sleepy (ESS<=10) and sleep onset/maintenance insomnia); and 3) Minimally Symptomatic (not sleepy (ESS<=10) and no sleep onset/maintenance insomnia). Distribution of clusters in the WTC cohort was compared to published data from the Sleep Apnea Global Interdisciplinary Consortium (SAGIC) and the Hispanic Community Health Study/Study of Latinos (HCHS/SOL). Results Among the subjects diagnosed with OSA (N 440; AHI4%=13(15); RDI =28(19); median(iqr); 81% men; age, 33–87 years; BMI, 27.4±3.7 kg/m2), the distribution of clinical phenotypes was 31.4% sleepy, 48.9% disturbed sleep, and 19.7% minimally symptomatic, and did not differ between OSA severity groups. In comparison to SAGIC and HCHS/SOL, the WTC cohort exhibited significantly increased prevalence of the disturbed sleep phenotype (WTC vs SAGIC: 48.9% vs. 19.8%, □2=54.9; p<0.001; WTC vs. HCHS/SOL: 48.9% vs. 38.1%, □2=26.1, p<0.001). Conclusion The predominant clinical phenotype of OSA in the WTC cohort is disturbed sleep (insomnia) and its prevalence is significantly greater than what has been observed in other large OSA cohorts. These findings may help explain the poor adherence to PAP treatment observed in the WTC cohort. Support (if any) NIOSH U01OH01415; AASM Foundation 233-BS-20.
APA, Harvard, Vancouver, ISO, and other styles
23

Ballard, Chris, Jeroen A. Overweel, Timothy P. Barnard, Daniel Perret, Peter Boomgaard, Om Prakash, U. T. Bosma, et al. "Book Reviews." Bijdragen tot de taal-, land- en volkenkunde / Journal of the Humanities and Social Sciences of Southeast Asia 155, no. 4 (1999): 683–736. http://dx.doi.org/10.1163/22134379-90003866.

Full text
Abstract:
- Chris Ballard, Jeroen A. Overweel, Topics relating to Netherlands New Guinea in Ternate Residency memoranda of transfer and other assorted documents. Leiden: DSALCUL, Jakarta: IRIS, 1995, x + 146 pp. [Irian Jaya Source Materials 13.] - Timothy P. Barnard, Daniel Perret, Sejarah Johor-Riau-Lingga sehingga 1914; Sebuah esei bibliografi. Kuala Lumpur: Kementerian Kebudayaan, Kesenian dan Pelancongan Malaysia/École Francaise d’Extrême Orient, 1998, 460 pp. - Peter Boomgaard, Om Prakash, European commercial enterprise in pre-colonial India. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1998, xviii + 377 pp. [The New Cambridge History of India II-5.] - U.T. Bosma, Oliver Kortendick, Drei Schwestern und ihre Kinder; Rekonstruktion von Familiengeschichte und Identitätstransmission bei Indischen Nerlanders mit Hilfe computerunterstützter Inhaltsanalyse. Canterbury: Centre for Social Anthropology and Computing, University of Kent at Canterbury, 1996, viii + 218 pp. [Centre for Social Anthropology and Computing Monograph 12.] - Freek Colombijn, Thomas Psota, Waldgeister und Reisseelen; Die Revitalisierung von Ritualen zur Erhaltung der komplementären Produktion in SüdwestSumatra. Berlin: Reimer, 1996, 203 + 15 pp. [Berner Sumatraforschungen.] - Christine Dobbin, Ann Maxwell Hill, Merchants and migrants; Ethnicity and trade among Yunannese Chinese in Southeast Asia. New Haven: Yale University Southeast Asia Studies, 1998, vii + 178 pp. [Yale Southeast Asia Studies Monograph 47.] - Aone van Engelenhoven, Peter Bellwood, The Austronesians; Historical and comparative perspectives. Canberra: Department of Anthropology, Research School of Pacific and Asian Studies, Australian National University, 1995, viii + 359 pp., James J. Fox, Darrell Tryon (eds.) - Aone van Engelenhoven, Wyn D. Laidig, Descriptive studies of languages in Maluku, Part II. Jakarta: Badan Penyelenggara Seri NUSA and Universitas Katolik Indonesia Atma Jaya, 1995, xii + 112 pp. [NUSA Linguistic Studies of Indonesian and Other Languages in Indonesia 38.] - Ch. F. van Fraassen, R.Z. Leirissa, Halmahera Timur dan Raja Jailolo; Pergolakan sekitar Laut Seram awal abad 19. Jakarta: Balai Pustaka, 1996, xiv + 256 pp. - Frances Gouda, Denys Lombard, Rêver l’Asie; Exotisme et littérature coloniale aux Indes, an Indochine et en Insulinde. Paris: Éditions de l’École des Hautes Études en Sciences Sociales, 1993, 486 pp., Catherine Champion, Henri Chambert-Loir (eds.) - Hans Hägerdal, Timothy Lindsey, The romance of K’tut Tantri and Indonesia; Texts and scripts, history and identity. Kuala Lumpur: Oxford University Press, 1997, xix + 362 + 24 pp. - Renee Hagesteijn, Ina E. Slamet-Velsink, Emerging hierarchies; Processes of stratification and early state formation in the Indonesian archipelago: prehistory and the ethnographic present. Leiden: KITLV Press, 1995, ix + 279 pp. [VKI 166.] - David Henley, Victor T. King, Environmental challenges in South-East Asia. Richmond: Curzon Press, 1998, xviii + 410 pp. [Nordic Institute of Asian Studies, Man and Nature in Asia Series 2.] - C. de Jonge, Ton Otto, Cultural dynamics of religious change in Oceania. Leiden: KITLV Press, 1997, viii + 144 pp. [VKI 176.], Ad Boorsboom (eds.) - C. de Jonge, Chris Sugden, Seeking the Asian face of Jesus; A critical and comparative study of the practice and theology of Christian social witness in Indonesia and India between 1974 and 1996. Oxford: Regnum, 1997, xix + 496 pp. - John N. Miksic, Roy E. Jordaan, In praise of Prambanan; Dutch essays on the Loro Jonggrang temple complex. Leiden: KITLV Press, 1996, xii + 259 pp. [Translation Series 26.] - Marije Plomp, Ann Kumar, Illuminations; The writing traditions of Indonesia; Featuring manuscripts from the National Library of Indonesia. Jakarta: The Lontar Foundation, New York: Weatherhill, 1996., John H. McGlynn (eds.) - Susan de Roode, Eveline Ferretti, Cutting across the lands; An annotated bibliography on natural resource management and community development in Indonesia, the Philippines and Malaysia. Ithaca, New York: Cornell University Southeast Asia Program, 1997, 329 pp. [Southeast Asia Program Series 16.] - M.J.C. Schouten, Monika Schlicher, Portugal in Ost-Timor; Eine kritische Untersuchung zur portugiesischen Kolonialgeschichte in Ost-Timor, 1850 bis 1912. Hamburg: Abera-Verlag, 1996, 347 pp. - Karel Steenbrink, Leo Dubbeldam, Values and value education. The Hague: Centre for the Study of Education in Developing Countries (CESO), 1995, 183 pp. [CESO Paperback 25.] - Pamela J. Stewart, Michael Houseman, Naven or the other self; A relational approach to ritual action. Leiden: Brill, 1998, xvi + 325 pp., Carlo Severi (eds.) - Han F. Vermeulen, Pieter ter Keurs, The language of things; Studies in ethnocommunication; In honour of Professor Adrian A. Gerbrands. Leiden: Rijksmuseum voor Volkenkunde, 1990, 208 pp. [Mededelingen van het Rijksmuseum voor Volkenkunde 25.], Dirk Smidt (eds.)
APA, Harvard, Vancouver, ISO, and other styles
24

Sukanadi, I. Made. "DAMPAK EKSISTENSI MOTIF BATIK WALANG JATI KENCONO TERHADAP PENINGKATAN EKONOMI DAN SOSIAL PENGRAJIN BATIK DI GUNUNGKIDUL." Gorga : Jurnal Seni Rupa 11, no. 2 (December 20, 2022): 456. http://dx.doi.org/10.24114/gr.v11i2.39026.

Full text
Abstract:
This research aims to answer the problem of the impact of the existence of the Walang Jati Kencono batik motif on the social and economic changes of the community and batik craftsmen of Gunungkidul Regency. The existence of regulation from the Regional Government of Gunung Kidul Regency regarding the use of batik uniforms for elementary, junior high, and high school / vocational schools has strengthened the existence of batik products and the sustainability of batik production by batik craftsmen in Gunungkidul. This research uses the qualitative descriptive method. The data collection method uses observation, interview, and documentation techniques. Data validation by triangulation and data analysis used the stages of data reduction, data presentation, and creating conclusions. The results of this study explain that: (1) The existence of the Walang Jati Kencono batik motif, which has been designated as a school uniform in Gunungkidul Regency, has a very impact on social changes in the batik craftsmen, which increases and as the economy improves. (2) The policy of the Gunungkidul Regency government through the Regent's Regulation that raises the Walang Jati Kencono batik motif as a school uniform in the Gunungkidul area strongly supports economic progress and the existence of batik craftsmen in Gunungkidul. (3) The skills of batik makers in Gunungkidul as batik producers can meet the needs of the local market both from the official, school, and tourism sectors.Keywords: batik, walang jati kencono, gunungkidul. AbstrakPenelitian ini memiliki tujuan menjawab permasalahan dampak eksistensi motif batik Walang Jati Kencono terhadap perubahan sosial dan ekonomi masyarakat dan pengrajin batik Kabupaten Gunungkidul. Adanya peraturan Pemerintah Daerah Kabupaten Gunung Kidul tentang penggunaan seragam batik bagi sekolah SD, SMP, SMA/SMK telah memperkuat eksistensi produk batik hasil dan keberlangsungan produksi batik oleh pengrajin batik di Gunungkidul. Penelitian ini menggunakan metode deskriptif kualitatif. Metode pengumpulan data menggunakan teknik observasi, wawancara, dan dokumentasi. Validasi data dengan triangulasi dan analisis data menggunakan tahapan reduksi data, penyajian data, dan penarikan kesimpulan. Hasil penelitian ini menjelaskan bahwa: (1) Eksistensi motif batik Walang Jati Kencono yang telah ditetapkan sebagai seragam sekolah di Kabupaten Gunungkidul sangat memberikan dampak terhadap perubahan sosial jumlah pengrajin batik yang meningkat dan seiring dengan peningkatan ekonomi. (2) Kebijakan pemerintah Kabupaten Gunungkidul melalui Peraturan Bupati yang mengangkat batik motif Walang Jati Kencono sebagai seragam sekolah di wilayah Gunungkidul sangat mendukung kemajuan ekonomi dan eksistensi pengrajin batik di Gunungkidul. (3) Keterampilan para pembatik di Gunungkidul sebagai produsen batik mampu memenuhi kebutuhan pasar lokal baik dari sektor dinas, sekolah, dan pariwisata.Kata Kunci:batik, walang jati kencono, gunungkidul. Author :I Made Sukanadi : Institut Seni Indonesia Yogyakarta References :Amidjaja, N. T. (1966). Batik. Jakarta: Djambatan.BAPPEDA, B. (2018). Informasi Pembangunan Kabupaten Gunungkidul. Informasi BAPPEDA, Gunungkidul Yogyakarta: BAPPEDA.Bolaffi, G., & Raffaele, B. (2003). Dictionary of Race, Ethnicity and Culture. London-Thousand Oaks-New Delhi: Sage Publications.Dharsono, D. (2016). Kreasi Artistik Perjumpaan Tradisi Modern Dalam Paradigma Kekaryaan Seni. Karanganyar: Citra Seni Lembaga Pengkajian dan Konservasi Budaya Nusantara.Erawati, N. V., & Kahono, S. (2010). Keanekaragaman dan kelimpahan belalang dan kerabatnya (Orthoptera) pada dua ekosistem pegunungan di Taman Nasional Gunung Halimun-Salak. Jurnal Entomologi Indonesia, 7(2), 100-100.Erniwati, E. (2017). Pola Aktivitas dan Keanekaragaman Belalang (Insecta: Orthoptera) di Taman Naasional Gunung Ciremai, Kuningan, Jawa Barat. Jurnal Biologi Indonesia, 5(3).Gustami, S. P. (2008). Nukilan Seni Ornamen Indonesia. Yogyakarta: Jurusan Kriya Fakultas Seni Rupa Institut Seni Indonesia, Arindo.Hadiwijiono, H. (2001). Sari Sejarah Filsafat Barat 2. Yogyakarta: Kanisius.Helmiati, H., Misgiya, M., Atmojo, W. T., & Silaban, B. (2020). Eksperimen Pewarnaan Batik Dengan Bahan Alami Buah Naga (Hylocereus Undatus). Gorga : Jurnal Seni Rupa, 9(1), 22. https://doi.org/10.24114/gr.v9i1.16973.Langsing, M. K. (1974). Art, Artist, and Art Education. New York: Mc Graww-Hill Book Company.Mpapa, B. L. (2016). Analisis kesuburan tanah tempat tumbuh pohon jati (Tectona grandis L.) pada ketinggian yang berbeda. Jurnal Agrista, 20(3), 135-139.Natanegara, E. A., & Djaya, D. (2015). Batik Indonesia. In Yayasan Batik Indonesia: Harapan Prima Printing.Nasution, S, and Kaelan, K. (2005). Buku Penuntun Membuat Tesis, Skripsi, Disertasi. Jakarta: Bumi Aksara.Pebriyeni, E. (2019). Perkembangan Fungsi Seni Kerajinan Tenun Songket Silungkang. Gorga : Jurnal Seni Rupa, 8(1), 214. https://doi.org/10.24114/gr.v8i1.13585.Rahayu, S. (2017). Ensiklopedia Keanekaragaman Belalang (Acrididae) Taman Hutan Raya Bunder Gunungkidul Sebagai Sumber Belajar Biologi. Skripsi tidak diterbitkan. Yogyakarta: Program Studi Pendidikan Biologi UIN Sunan Kalijaga.Sembiring, S. B., & Guntur. (2018). Fungsi Topeng Tembut-Tembut Desa Seberaya Kecamatan Tiga Panah Kabupaten Karo. Gorga : Jurnal Seni Rupa, 07(01).Supriono, P. (2016). Ensiklopedia The Heritage of Batik Identitas Pemersatu Kebanggaan Bangsa karya Supriono. Andi Yogyakarta.Turner, V. W. (1982). From Ritual to Theatre (the human seriousness of play). New York: PAJ Publications.Wansaka, A., Hidayah, H. N., & Bakhittah, H. A. (2019). Kampung Batik Manding Siberkreasi sebagai Model Pelestarian Pendidikan Karakter. Jurnal Pendidikan Sejarah Indonesia, 2(2), 122-140.Wardoyo, S., Wulandari, T., Guntur, Dharsono, & Zularnain. (2021). Penciptaan Selendang Batik Sri Kuncoro Khas Budaya Samin Margomulyo Bojonegoro. Gorga : Jurnal Seni Rupa, 10(November).Williams, R. (1989). Resources of Hope : Culture, Democracy, Socialism. R. Gable (ed): Verso.Wulandari, T. (2021). Eksistensi Batik Encim Dalam Arena Produksi Kultural Di Pekalongan. Gorga : Jurnal Seni Rupa, 10(1), 164–171. https://doi.org/10.24114/gr.v10i1.25255.
APA, Harvard, Vancouver, ISO, and other styles
25

Simanjorang, Gibson, Teti Berliani, and PIter Joko Nugroho. "PEMBINAAN ETOS KERJA GURU DI SMAS GOLDEN CHRISTIAN SCHOOL PALANGKA RAYA." Equity In Education Journal 2, no. 1 (March 20, 2020): 29–38. http://dx.doi.org/10.37304/eej.v2i1.1683.

Full text
Abstract:
Abstrak: Penelitian ini bertujuan untuk mendeskripsikan pembinaan etos kerja guru di Sekolah Menengah Atas Swasta (SMAS) Golden Christian School (GCS) Palangka Raya. Penelitian ini menggunakan pendekatan kualitatif dengan rancangan studi kasus. Pengumpulan data menggunakan teknik observasi, wawancara, dan studi dokumentasi. Analisis data menggunakan pola interaktif data meliputi: reduksi data, penyajian data, dan penarikan kesimpulan. Pengecekan keabsahan data dilakukan dengan menggunakan derajat kepercayaan melalui teknik triangulasi baik sumber maupun metode. Hasil penelitian mengungkap bahwa dengan pembinaan etos kerja guru oleh kepala sekolah yang dilaksanakan dengan menerapkan berbagai strategi pembinaan melalui berbagai kegiatan pengembangan profesional guru dan dilaksanakan melalui mekanisme dan pentahapan yang jelas; serta ditunjang dengan berbagai faktor pendukung yang tersedia di sekolah dapat meminimalisir berbagai kendala yang dihadapi sekolah dalam membina etos kerja guru, sekaligus mampu menjadikan SMAS GCS sebagai salah satu sekolah swasta pilihan terbaik bagi masyarakat di Kota Palangka Raya. Abstract: This study aims to describe the coaching of the work ethic of teachers in the Golden Christian School (GCS) Private High School Palangka Raya. This study used a qualitative approach with case study design. Data collection using observation, interview and study of document. Data analysis using interactive data patterns include: data reduction, data display, and drawing conclusions. Checking the validity of the data obtained is done by using a degree of trust through triangulation techniques both sources and methods. The results of the study reveal that with the guidance of the teacher's work ethic by the principal which is carried out by implementing various coaching strategies through various teacher professional development activities and carried out through clear mechanisms and phases; and also supported by various supporting factors that available in schools can minimize the various obstacles faced by schools in fostering teacher work ethics, as well as being able to make GCS Private High School as one of the best choice private schools for the community in Palangka Raya City. References: Ali, M. (2009). Pendidikan untuk Pembangunan Nasional: Menuju Bangsa Indonesia yang Mandiri dan Berdaya Saing Tinggi. Bandung: Imperial Bhakti Utama. Anaroga, P. (2001). Psikologi Kerja. Jakarta: Rineke Cipta. Arifin, I. (2001, 25-26 Juli). Profesionalisme Guru: Analisis Wacana Reformasi Pendidikan dalam Era Globalisasi. Makalah disampaikan dalam Simposium Nasional Pendidikan di Universitas Muhammadiyah Malang. Asriani., Murniati, A. R., & Bahrun. (2017). Kepemimpinan Kepala Madrasah dalam Memotivasi Kerja Guru pada MTS Swasta LAM Ujong Kabupaten Aceh Besar. Jurnal Magister Administrasi Pendidikan, 5(2), 121-126. Diterima dari http://www.jurnal.unsyiah.ac.id/JAP/article/view/8361/7333. Beason, L. (2001). Ethos and Error: How Business People React to Errors. Accessed 19 December 2019, retrieved from http://faculty.winthrop.edu/ kosterj/writ465/samples/beason.pdf. Chan, M. C., & San, T. T. (2010). Analisis SWOT Kebijakan Pendidikan dan Era Otonomi Daerah. Jakarta: RajaGrafindo Persada. Fatikah, N., & Fildayanti. (2019). Strategi Kepala Sekolah Dalam Peningkatan Motivasi Dan Etos Kerja Guru Di Sekolah Menengah Atas Negeri Bareng Jombang. Indonesian Journal of Islamic Education Studies (IJIES), 2(2), 167-182. doi: https://doi.org/10.33367/ijies.v2i2.989. Goldhammer, R., Anderson, R. H., Krawjewski, R. J. (1980). Clinical Supervision: Special Methods for The Supervision of Teachers. New York: Holt, Rinehart, and Winston. Indrakusuma, A. (2010). Pengantar Ilmu Pendidikan. Surabaya: Usaha Nasional. Latief, E. 2010. Hubungan antara Amanah, Etos Kerja dan Profesionalisme pada Rumah Zakat Indonesia. Tesis tidak dipublikasikan, Universitas Indonesia: Program Pascasarjana. Diterima dari http://lib.ui.ac.id/file?file=pdf/abstrak/id_abstrak-20342190.pdf. Manik, R. (2019). Implementasi Pemberian Reward dan Punishment Untuk Meningkatkan Etos Kerja Guru. Jurnal Masalah Pastoral, 7(XX), 80-95. Diterima dari https://ojs.stkyakobus.ac.id/index.php/JUMPA/. Masaong, A. K. (2013). Memberdayakan Pengawas sebagai Gurunya Guru. Bandung: Penerbit Alfabeta. Miles, M. B., & Huberman, A. M. (1994). Analisis Data Kualitatif. Buku Sumber tentang Metode-metode Baru. Jakarta: Universitas Indonesia Press. Mulyani, S. (2016). Pengaruh Kepemimpinan Kepala Sekolah dan Etos Kerja Guru serta Pegawai terhadap Iklim Organisasi pada SMP Negeri 225 Jakarta. Journal of Economics and Business Aseanomics (JEBA), 1(1), 38-56. doi: https://doi.org/10.33476/jeba.v1i1.398. Mustofa. (2007). Upaya Pengembangan Profesional Guru di Indonesia. Jurnal Ekonomi dan Pendidikan, 4(1), 76-88. doi: https://doi.org/10.21831/jep.v4i1. Neagley, R. L., & Evans, N. D. (1980). Handbook for Effective Supervision of Instruction. New Jersey: Prentice Hall, Inc. Nopemberi, A. D. (2015). Fungsi Kepala Sekolah dalam Meningkatkan Kinerja Guru. Manajer Pendidikan, 9(3), 394-403. Diterima dari https://ejournal.unib.ac.id/index.php/manajerpendidikan/article/view/1136/944. Norris, P. (2003). Still a Public Service Ethos? Work Values, Experience and Job Satisfaction among Government Workers. Accessed 19 December 2019, retrieved from https://wcfia.harvard.edu/publications/still-public-service-ethos-work-values-experience-and-job-satisfaction-among. Nugroho, P. J. (2017). Home Visiting Supervision (HVS): An Alternative Approach to Increase the Commitment of Elementary Teachers in Remote Areas. International Research- Based Education Journal, 1(1), 39-45. doi: http://dx.doi.org/10.17977/ um043v1i1p%25p. Nuraini, S. K. (2012). Pengaruh Reward and Punishment terhadap Kinerja Karyawan PT. Perkebunan Nusantara V Afdeling III Kebun Sei Galuh. Skripsi tidak dipublikasikan, Jakarta: Program Pascasarjana Universitas Indonesia. Diterima dari http://repository.uin-suska.ac.id/7997/1/2012_201244KOM.pdf. Octaviana, M., & Silalahi, D. K. (2016). Kepemimpinan Transformasional Kepala Sekolah. Polyglot, 12(1), 1-9. doi: http://dx.doi.org/10.19166/pji.v12i1.376. Pidarta, M. (2009) Supervisi Pendidikan Kontekstual. Jakarta: Rineka Cipta. Pongoh, S. (2013). Etos Kerja Guru: Faktor yang Mempengaruhi dan Dipengaruhi. Surabaya: CV. R. A. De Rozarie. Prasasti, S. (2017). Etos Kerja dan Profesional Guru. Jurnal Ilmiah PENJAS (Penelitian, Pendidikan dan Pengajaran, 3(2), 74-89. Diterima dari http://ejournal.utp.ac.id/index.php/JIP/ article/view/589. Purwanto, N. (2004). Administrasi dan Supervisi Pendidikan. Bandung: Remadja Rosdakarya. Rifai, M. (1982). Pengantar Administrasi dan Supervisi Pendidikan. Bandung: Baru. Rivai, V. (2006). Kepemimpinan dan Perilaku Organisasi. Jakarta: Radja Grafindo Persada. Robbins, S. P. (1999). Organizational Behavior. New Delhi: Prentice-Hall. Rose, A. (2005). Ethics and Human Resources Management.Accessed 19 December 2019, retrieved from https://dphu.org/uploads/attachements/books/books_4824_0.pdf. Sagita, D. D. (2018, 24 Maret). Implementasi Layanan ICS-GD dalam Meningkatan Pemahaman dan Sikap Siswa tentang Nilai-Nilai Kehidupan Islam di SMA Muhammadiyah DKI Jakarta. Makalah disajikan pada Seminar Nasional PendidikanEra Revolusi “Membangun Sinergitas dalam Penguatan Pendidikan Karakter pada Era IR 4.0”, Universitas Muhammadiyah Jakarta, Indonesia. Diterima dari https://jurnal.umj.ac.id/index.php/ SNP/article/view/2752/2209. Saifulloh. (2010). Etos Kerja dalam Perspektif Islam. Jurnal Sosial Humaniora, 3(1), 54-69. doi: http://dx.doi.org/10.12962/j24433527.v3i1.654. Sarjana, S. (2014). Pengaruh Kepemimpinan dan Kerjasama Tim terhadap Etika Kerja Guru SMK. Jurnal Pendidikan dan Kebudayaan, 20(2), 234-250. doi: https://doi.org/10.24832/jpnk.v20i2.14. Schermerhorn, J. R. (2010). Introduction to Management. Asia: John Wiley & Sons. Sergiovanni, T. J., & Starratt, R. J. (1983). Supervision: Human Perspective. New York: McGraw-Hill Book, Co. Sinamo, J. (2002). Etos Kerja Profesional di Era Digital Global. Jakarta: Institut Darma Mahardika. Sunardi, S., Nugroho, P. J., & Setiawan, S. (2019). Kepemimpinan Instruksional Kepala Sekolah. Equity in Education Journal, 1(1), 20-28. Retrieved from https://e-journal.upr.ac.id/index.php/eej/article/view/1548. Sunarto. (2019). Pentingnya Etos Kerja bagi Pengembangan Profesional Guru. Diakses tanggal 15 Desember 2019, dari http://formenews.id/2019/02/10/pentingnya-etos-kerja-bagi-pengembangan-profesional-guru/. Syamsul, H. (2017). Penerapan Kepemimpinan Kepala Sekolah dalam Meningkatkan Kinerja Guru pada Jenjang Sekolah Menengah Pertama (SMP). Jurnal Idaarah, 1(2), 275-289. doi: https://doi.org/10.24252/idaarah.v1i2.4271. Tjiptono, F., & Diana, A. 2002. Total Quality Management. Yogyakarta: Andi Offset. Wibowo. (2009). Manajemen Kinerja. Jakarta. Rajawali Press. Yamin, M. (2010). Standarisasi kinerja guru. Jakarta: Gaung Persada.
APA, Harvard, Vancouver, ISO, and other styles
26

Farmer, Kristine, Jeff Allen, Malak Khader, Tara Zimmerman, and Peter Johnstone. "Paralegal Students’ and Paralegal Instructors’ Perceptions of Synchronous and Asynchronous Online Paralegal Course Effectiveness: A Comparative Study." International Journal for Educational and Vocational Studies 3, no. 1 (March 30, 2021): 1. http://dx.doi.org/10.29103/ijevs.v3i1.3550.

Full text
Abstract:
To improve online learning pedagogy within the field of paralegal education, this study investigated how paralegal students and paralegal instructors perceived the effectiveness of synchronous and asynchronous online paralegal courses. This study intended to inform paralegal instructors and course developers how to better design, deliver, and evaluate effective online course instruction in the field of paralegal studies.Survey results were analyzed using independent samples t-test and correlational analysis, and indicated that overall, paralegal students and paralegal instructors positively perceived synchronous and asynchronous online paralegal courses. Paralegal instructors reported statistically significant higher perceptions than paralegal students: (1) of instructional design and course content in synchronous online paralegal courses; and (2) of technical assistance, communication, and course content in asynchronous online paralegal courses. Instructors also reported higher perceptions of the effectiveness of universal design, online instructional design, and course content in synchronous online paralegal courses than in asynchronous online paralegal courses. Paralegal students reported higher perceptions of asynchronous online paralegal course effectiveness regarding universal design than paralegal instructors. No statistically significant differences existed between paralegal students’ perceptions of the effectiveness of synchronous and asynchronous online paralegal courses. A strong, negative relationship existed between paralegal students’ age and their perceptions of effective synchronous paralegal courses, which were statistically and practically significant. Lastly, this study provided practical applicability and opportunities for future research. Akyol, Z., & Garrison, D. R. (2008). The development of a community of inquiry over time in an online course: Understanding the progression and integration of social, cognitive and teaching presence. Journal of Asynchronous Learning Networks, 12, 3-22. Retrieved from https://files.eric.ed.gov/fulltext/EJ837483.pdf Akyol, Z., Garrison, D. R., & Ozden, M. Y. (2009). Online and blended communities of inquiry: Exploring the developmental and perceptional differences. The International Review of Research in Open and Distributed Learning, 10(6), 65-83. Retrieved from http://www.irrodl.org/index.php/irrodl/article/view/765/1436 Allen, I. E., & Seaman, J. (2014). Grade change: Tracking online education in the United States. Babson Park, MA: Babson Survey Research Group and Quahog Research Group, LLC. Retrieved from https://www.utc.edu/learn/pdfs/online/sloanc-report-2014.pdf Alreck, P. L., & Settle, R. B. (2004). The Survey Research Handbook (3rd ed.) New York, NY: McGraw-Hill Irwin. American Association for Paralegal Education (2013, Oct.). AAfPE core competencies for paralegal programs. Retrieved from https://cdn.ymaws.com/www.aafpe.org/resource/resmgr/Docs/AAfPECoreCompetencies.pdf American Bar Association, Standing Committee on Paralegals. (2017). https://www.americanbar.org/groups/paralegals.html American Bar Association, Standing Committee on Paralegals (2013, September). Guidelines for the approval of paralegal education programs. Retrieved from https://www.americanbar.org/content/dam/aba/administrative/paralegals/ls_prlgs_2013_paralegal_guidelines.authcheckdam.pdf Astani, M., Ready, K. J., & Duplaga, E. A. (2010). Online course experience matters: Investigating students’ perceptions of online learning. Issues in Information Systems, 11(2), 14-21. Retrieved from http://iacis.org/iis/2010/14-21_LV2010_1526.pdf Bailey, C. J., & Card, K. A. (2009). Effective pedagogical practices for online teaching: Perception of experienced instructors. The Internet and Higher Education, 12, 152-155. doi: 10.1016/j.iheduc.2009.08.002 Bernard, R., Abrami, P., Borokhovski, E., Wade, C., Tamim , R., Surkes, M., & Bethel, E. (2009). A meta-analysis of three types of interaction treatments in distance education. Review of Educational Research, 79, 1243-1289. doi: 10.3102/0034654309333844 Cherry, S. J., & Flora, B. H. (2017). Radiography faculty engaged in online education: Perceptions of effectiveness, satisfaction, and technological self-efficacy. Radiologic Technology, 88(3), 249-262. http://www.radiologictechnology.org/ Cohen, J. (1988). Statistical power analysis for the behavioral sciences (2nd ed.). New York: Taylor & Francis Group. Colorado, J. T., & Eberle, J. (2010). Student demographics and success in online learning environments. Emporia State Research Studies, 46(1), 4-10. Retrieved from https://esirc.emporia.edu/bitstream/handle/123456789/380/205.2.pdf?sequence=1 Dutcher, C. W., Epps, K. K., & Cleaveland, M. C. (2015). Comparing business law in online and face to face formats: A difference in student learning perception. Academy of Educational Leadership Journal, 19, 123-134. http://www.abacademies.org/journals/academy-of-educational-leadership-journal-home.html Faul, F., Erdfelder, E., Lang, A.-G., & Buchner, A. (2007). G*Power 3: A flexible statistical power analysis program for the social, behavioral, and biomedical sciences. Behavior Research Methods, 39, 175-191. Retrieved from http://www.gpower.hhu.de/fileadmin/redaktion/Fakultaeten/Mathematisch-Naturwissenschaftliche_Fakultaet/Psychologie/AAP/gpower/GPower3-BRM-Paper.pdf Field, A. (2009). Discovery statistics using SPSS. (3rd ed.). Thousand Oaks, CA: Sage Publications, Inc. Gall M., Borg, W., & Gall, J. (1996). Educational research: An introduction (6th ed.). White Plains, NY: Longman Press. Garrison, D. R., Anderson, T., & Archer, W. (2001). Critical thinking, cognitive presence, and computer conferencing in distance education. American Journal of distance education, 15(1), 7-23. Retrieved from http://cde.athabascau.ca/coi_site/documents/Garrison_Anderson_Archer_CogPres_Final.pdf Green, S. B., & Salkind, N. J. (2005). Using SPSS for Windows and Macintosh: Internal consistency estimates of reliability. Upper Saddle River, NJ: Pearson Prentice Hall. Harrell, I. L. (2008). Increasing the Success of Online Students. Inquiry, 13(1), 36-44. Retrieved from http://files.eric.ed.gov/fulltext/EJ833911.pdf Horspool, A., & Lange, C. (2012). Applying the scholarship of teaching and learning: student perceptions, behaviours and success online and face-to-face. Assessment & Evaluation in Higher Education, 37, 73-88. doi: 10.1080/02602938.2010.496532 Inman, E., Kerwin, M., & Mayes, L. (1999). Instructor and student attitudes toward distance learning. Community College Journal of Research & Practice, 23, 581-591. doi:10.1080/106689299264594 Institute of Legal Executives (ILEX). https://www.cilexcareers.org.uk/ Johnson, J. & Taggart, G. (1996). Computer assisted instruction in paralegal education: Does it help? Journal of Paralegal Education and Practice, 12, 1-21. Johnstone, Q. & Flood, J. (1982). Paralegals in English and American law offices. Windsor YB Access to Justice 2, 152. Jones, S. J. (2012). Reading between the lines of online course evaluations: Identifiable actions that improve student perceptions of teaching effectiveness and course value. Journal of Asynchronous Learning Networks, 16(1), 49-58. doi:http://dx.doi.org/10.24059/olj.v16i1.227 Krejcie, R. V., & Morgan, D. W. (1970). Determining sample size for research activities. Educational and psychological measurement, 30, 607-610. http://journals.sagepub.com/home/epm Liu, S., Gomez, J., Khan, B., & Yen, C. J. (2007). Toward a learner-oriented community college online course dropout framework. International Journal on ELearning, 6(4), 519-542. https://www.learntechlib.org/j/IJEL/ Lloyd, S. A., Byrne, M. M., & McCoy, T. S. (2012). Faculty-perceived barriers of online education. Journal of online learning and teaching, 8(1), 1-12. Retrieved from http://jolt.merlot.org/vol8no1/lloyd_0312.pdf Lockee, B., Burton, J., & Potter, K. (2010, March). Organizational perspectives on quality in distance learning. In D. Gibson & B. Dodge (Eds.), Proceedings of SITE 2010—Society for Information Technology & Teacher Education International Conference (pp. 659-664). San Diego, CA: Association for the Advancement of Computing in Education (AACE). https://www.learntechlib.org/p/33419/ Lowerison, G., Sclater, J., Schmid, R. F., & Abrami, P. C. (2006). Student perceived effectiveness of computer technology use in post-secondary classrooms. Computers & Education, 47(4), 465-489. doi:10.1016/j.compedu.2004.10.014 Retrieved from https://pdfs.semanticscholar.org/fc9c/13f0187d3967217aa82cc96c188427e29ec9.pdf Martins, L. L., & Kellermanns, F. W. (2004). A model of business school students' acceptance of a web-based course management system. Academy of Management Learning & Education, 3(1), 7-26. doi: 10.5465/AMLE.2004.12436815 Mayes, J. T. (2001). Quality in an e-University. Assessment & Evaluation in Higher Education, 26, 465-473. doi:10.1080/02602930120082032 McCabe, S. (2007). A brief history of the paralegal profession. Michigan Bar Journal, 86(7), 18-21. Retrieved from https://www.michbar.org/file/barjournal/article/documents/pdf4article1177.pdf McMillan, J. H. (2008). Educational Research: Fundamentals for the customer. Boston, MA: Pearson Education, Inc. Myers, C. B., Bennett, D., Brown, G., & Henderson, T. (2004). Emerging online learning environments and student learning: An analysis of faculty perceptions. Educational Technology & Society, 7(1), 78-86. Retrieved from http://www.ifets.info/journals/7_1/9.pdf Myers, K. (2002). Distance education: A primer. Journal of Paralegal Education & Practice, 18, 57-64. Nunnaly, J. (1978). Psychometric theory. New York: McGraw-Hill. Otter, R. R., Seipel, S., Graeff, T., Alexander, B., Boraiko, C., Gray, J., Petersen, K., & Sadler, K. (2013). Comparing student and faculty perceptions of online and traditional courses. The Internet and Higher Education, 19, 27-35. doi:10.1016/j.iheduc.2013.08.001 Popham, W. J. (2000). Modern educational measurement: Practical guidelines for educational leaders. Boston, MA: Allyn & Bacon. Rich, A. J., & Dereshiwsky, M. I. (2011). Assessing the comparative effectiveness of teaching undergraduate intermediate accounting in the online classroom format. Journal of College Teaching and Learning, 8(9), 19. https://www.cluteinstitute.com/ojs/index.php/TLC/ Robinson, C., & Hullinger, H. (2008). New benchmarks in higher education: Student engagement in online learning. The Journal of Education for Business, 84(2), 101-109. Retrieved from http://anitacrawley.net/Resources/Articles/New%20Benchmarks%20in%20Higher%20Education.pdf Salkind, N. J. (2008). Statistics for people who think they hate statistics. Los Angeles, CA: Sage Publications. Santos, J. (1999, April). Cronbach's Alpha: A tool for assessing the reliability of scales. Journal of Extension, 37, 2. Retrieved from https://www.joe.org/joe/1999april/tt3.php Seok, S., DaCosta, B., Kinsell, C., & Tung, C. K. (2010). Comparison of instructors' and students' perceptions of the effectiveness of online courses. Quarterly Review of Distance Education, 11(1), 25. Retrieved from http://online.nuc.edu/ctl_en/wp-content/uploads/2015/08/Online-education-effectiviness.pdf Sheridan, K., & Kelly, M. A. (2010). The indicators of instructor presence that are important to students in online courses. Journal of Online Learning and Teaching, 6(4), 767-779. Retrieved from http://jolt.merlot.org/vol6no4/sheridan_1210.pdf Shook, B. L., Greer, M. J., & Campbell, S. (2013). Student perceptions of online instruction. International Journal of Arts & Sciences, 6(4), 337. Retrieved from https://s3.amazonaws.com/academia.edu.documents/34496977/Ophoff.pdf?AWSAccessKeyId=AKIAIWOWYYGZ2Y53UL3A&Expires=1508119686&Signature=J1lJ8VO0xardd%2FwH35pGj14UeBg%3D&response-content-disposition=inline%3B%20filename%3DStudent_Perceptions_of_Online_Learning.pdf Song, L., Singleton, E. S., Hill, J. R., & Koh, M. H. (2004). Improving online learning: Student perceptions of useful and challenging characteristics. The Internet and Higher Education, 7, 59-70. doi:10.1016/j.iheduc.2003.11.003 Steiner, S. D., & Hyman, M. R. (2010). Improving the student experience: Allowing students enrolled in a required course to select online or face-to-face instruction. Marketing Education Review, 20, 29-34. doi:10.2753/MER1052-8008200105 Stoel, L., & Hye Lee, K. (2003). Modeling the effect of experience on student acceptance of web-based courseware. Internet Research, 13(5), 364-374. http://www.emeraldinsight.com/loi/intr Taggart, G., & Bodle, J. H. (2003). Example of assessment of student outcomes data from on-line paralegal courses: Lessons learned. Journal of Paralegal Education & Practice, 19, 29-36. Tanner, J. R., Noser, T. C., & Totaro, M. W. (2009). Business faculty and undergraduate students' perceptions of online learning: A comparative study. Journal of Information Systems Education, 20, 29-40. http://jise.org/ Tung, C.K. (2007). Perceptions of students and instructors of online and web-enhanced course effectiveness in community colleges (Doctoral dissertation). Retrieved from ProQuest Dissertations and Theses database (Publication No. AAT 3284232). Vodanovich, S. J. & Piotrowski, C., & (2000). Are the reported barriers to Internet-based instruction warranted? A synthesis of recent research. Education, 121(1), 48-53. http://www.projectinnovation.com/education.html Ward, M. E., Peters, G., & Shelley, K. (2010). Student and faculty perceptions of the quality of online learning experiences. The International Review of Research in Open and Distributed Learning, 11, 57-77. Retrieved from http://www.irrodl.org/index.php/irrodl/article/view/867/1610? Wilkes, R. B., Simon, J. C., & Brooks, L. D. (2006). A comparison of faculty and undergraduate students' perceptions of online courses and degree programs. Journal of Information Systems Education, 17, 131-140. http://jise.org/
APA, Harvard, Vancouver, ISO, and other styles
27

Larasati, Puja, and Edy Yusuf Agung Gunanto. "FAKTOR PENENTU KEPUTUSAN BERBISNIS FASHION MUSLIM DENGAN PENDEKATAN AHP." Jurnal Ekonomi Syariah Teori dan Terapan 8, no. 6 (December 5, 2021): 669. http://dx.doi.org/10.20473/vol8iss20216pp669-685.

Full text
Abstract:
ABSTRAKIndustri halal dinilai memiliki peluang menjanjikan seiring meningkatnya gaya hidup halal dikalangan masyarakat. Dimana saat ini industri halal telah mencakup semua perspektif diberbagai bidang kebutuhan individu. Pemanfaatan barang halal sudah meluas baik bagi muslim maupun non-muslim yang peduli akan gaya hidup sehat, karena halal telah mencakup unsur kebersihan, keselamatan, dan keamanan. Hal ini berdampak pada tingginya minat konsumen terhadap produk halal baik itu barang ataupun jasa, sekaligus dapat menjadi peluang bisnis bagi produsen untuk mulai berkonsentrasi pada pembuatan produk halal guna memenuhi permintaan pasar. Tujuan penelitian ini untuk mengetahui faktor apa saja yang mempengaruhi keputusan pengusaha dalam memilih bisnis. Metode penelitian yang digunakan yaitu Analitical Hierarchy Process (AHP) dengan menggunakan alat analisis Expert Choice 11. Pemilihan metode analisis ini untuk mengetahui faktor terkuat yang mempengaruhi keputusan pengusaha berbisnis fashion muslim di Kota Semarang. Data yang bersifat kualitatif diperoleh melalui wawancara dengan bantuan kuesioner yang diajukan kepada 5 pengusaha fashion muslim di Kota Semarang. Hasil penelitian menunjukkan bahwa faktor-faktor yang mempengaruhi keputusan berbisnis fashion muslim setelah diurutkan yaitu Religiusitas (51,4%), Efikasi Diri (22,0%), Halal Lifestyle (15,5%), Motif Ekonomi (11,1%).Kata Kunci: Keputusan, Bisnis, Pengusaha Muslim, Fashion Muslim. ABSTRACTThe halal industry is considered have promising opportunities as the halal lifestyle increases among the community. Where now the halal industry has covered all perspectives in various fields of individual needs. The use of halal goods has expanded both for Muslims and non-Muslims who care about a healthy lifestyle, because halal includes elements of cleanliness, safety, and security. This has impact on high consumer interest in halal products, both goods and services, as well as a business opportunity for producers to start concentrating on making halal products to meet market demand. The purpose of this study to find out what factors influence the decision of entrepreneurs in choosing business. The research method used is Analytical Hierarchy Process (AHP) using Expert Choice 11 analysis tool. The selection of this analysis method is to determine the strongest factors that influence the decisions of Muslim fashion business entrepreneurs in Semarang City. Qualitative data were obtained through interviews with the help of questionnaires submitted to 5 Muslim fashion entrepreneurs in the city of Semarang. The results show that the factors that influence the decision to do business in Muslim fashion after being sorted are Religiosity (51,4%), Self-Efficacy (22,0%), Halal Lifestyle (15,5%), Economic Motives (11,1%).Keywords: Decision, Business, Muslim Entrepreneur, Muslim Fashion. DAFTAR PUSTAKAAdinugraha, H. H., & Sartika, M. (2019). Halal lifestyle di Indonesia. An-Nisbah: Jurnal Ekonomi Syariah, 5(2), 57–81. https://doi.org/10.21274/an.2019.5.2.layoutAkmal, R., Musa, A., & Ibrahim, A. (2020). Pengaruh religiusitas terhadap perilaku etika bisnis Islam pedagang pasar tradisional di Kota Banda Aceh. Journal of Sharia Economics, 1(1), 1–21. https://doi.org/10.22373/jose.v1i1.630Alaydrus, H. S. M. (2009). Agar hidup selalu berkah: Meraih ketentraman hati dengan hidup penuh berkah (Y. S. Hidayat (ed.); 1st ed.). Bandung: Mizan Media Utama.Ancok, D. D., & Suroso, F. N. (1994). Psikologi Islam: Solusi Islam atas problem-problem psikologi (M. S. Ardani (ed.); 2nd ed.). Yogyakarta: Pustaka Belajar.Anindya, D. A. (2017). Pengaruh etika bisnis Islam terhadap keuntungan usaha pada wirausaha di Desa Delitua Kecamatan Delitua. At-Tawassuth: Jurnal Ekonomi Islam, 2, 389–412. https://doi.org/http://dx.doi.org/10.30821/ajei.v2i2.1228Astogini, D., Wahyudin, & Wulandari, S. Z. (2011). Aspek religiusitas dalam keputusan pembelian produk halal (Studi tentang labelisasi halal pada produk makanan dan minuman kemasan). Jeba, 13(1), 1–8. https://doi.org/https://doi.org/10.32424/jeba.v13i1.345Aziz, A. (2008). Ekonomi Islam analisis mikro & makro (1st ed.). Yogyakarta: Graha Ilmu.Bandura, A. (1995). Self-efficacy in changing societies (Al. Bandura (ed.)). New York: Cambridge University Press.Budiati, A. C. (2011). Jilbab: Gaya hidup baru kaum hawa. Jurnal Sosiologi Islam, 1(1), 60–70. Diakses dari http://jurnalfisip.uinsby.ac.id/index.php/JSI/article/view/9Cholidiyah, N., & Mulyawisdawati, R. A. (2018). Perilaku produsen menurut Yusuf Qordhowi dan Karl Marx Nurul. Jurnal Ekonomi Islam, 5(2), 68–88. https://doi.org/https://doi.org/10.24252/lamaisyir.v5i2.6995Fardi, Z., & Rani, I. G. (2019). Pengaruh efikasi diri terhadap minat berwirausaha mahasiswa diploma 3 teknik sipil bangunan gedung FT UNP. Journal of Civil Engineering and Vocational Education, 6(4), 1–5. Diakses dari http://ejournal.unp.ac.id/index.php/cived/article/viewFile/107047/102697Farid. (2017). Kewirausahaan syariah (Riefmanto (ed.); 1st ed.). Depok: Kencana.Ghufron, M. N., & Suminta, R. R. (2016). Teori-teori psikologi (R. Kusumaningratri (ed.); III). Yogyakarta: Ar-Ruzz Media.Hamdan, A. (2018). Artikel lengkap membahas motif ekonomi. Diakses dari https://www.Alihamdan.Id/Motif-Ekonomi/.Hashim, M. (2012). Islamic perception of business ethics and the impact of secular thoughts on Islamic business ethics. International Journal of Academic Research in Business and Social Sciences, 2(3), 98–120. Diakses dari https://hrmars.com/papers_submitted/8820/islamic-perception-of-business-ethics-and-the-impact-of-secular-thoughts-on-islamic-business-ethics.pdfHisrich, R. D., Peters, M. P., & Shepherd, D. A. (2008). Entrepreneurship: Kewirausahaan (R. Widyaningrum (ed.); 5th ed.). Jakarta: Salemba Empat.Hoetoro, A. (2020). The relationship between love of money, Islamic religiosity and life satisfaction: a Muslim’s perspective. Iqtishadia, 13(1), 38. https://doi.org/10.21043/iqtishadia.v13i1.7333Ika Sandra, K. (2013). Manajemen waktu, efikasi-diri dan prokrastinasi. Persona: Jurnal Psikologi Indonesia, 2(3), 217–222. https://doi.org/10.30996/persona.v2i3.140Kahf, M. (1995). Ekonomi Islam: Telaah analitik sistem ekonomi Islam (D. K. Kusmarina, Widodo, & Gandung (eds.); 1st ed.). Yogyakarta: Pustaka Belajar.Kamma, H. (2015). Urgensi Teori Produksi dan perilaku produsen dalam perspektif Islam. Journal Muamalah, 5(1), 59–70. https://doi.org/https://doi.org/10.24256/m.v5i1.671Kasmir. (2010). Kewirausahaan (5th ed.). Jakarta: Rajawali Pers.Kementrian Perdagangan Republik Indonesia. (2015). Fesyen muslim Indonesia. Diakses dari http://djpen.Kemendag.Go.Id/App_frontend/Admin/Docs/Publication/9871447132408.Pdf, April, 1–20.Kotler, P., & Keller, K. L. (2008). Manajemen pemasaran (A. Maulana & Y. S. Hayati (eds.); 13th ed.). Jakarta: Erlangga.Makkasau, K. (2012). Penggunaan metode analytic hierarchy process (AHP) dalam penentuan prioritas program kesehatan (Studi kasus program promosi kesehatan). Jurnal Teknik Industri, 7(2), 105–112. https://doi.org/10.12777/jati.7.2.105-112Mulyono, S. (2017). Riset operasi (2nd ed.). Jakarta: Mitra Wacana Media.National Committee on Islamic Economic and Financial. (2020). Halal lifestyle to improve the quality of human life. Insight (Islamic Economy Bulletin), 12, 4–9. Diakses dari https://knks.go.id/storage/upload/1605495263-Insight Edisi 12 Fin.pdfNuandri, V. T., & Widayat, I. W. (2014). Hubungan antara sikap terhadap religiusitas dengan sikap terhadap kecenderungan perilaku seks pranikah pada remaja akhir yang sedang berpacaran di Universitas Airlangga Surabaya. Jurnal Psikologi Kepribadian Dan Sosial, 3(2), 60–69. Diakses dari http://journal.unair.ac.id/download-fullpapers-jpkse39b4068e8full.pdfPardanawati, S. L. (2017). Perilaku produsen Islam. Jurnal Ilmiah Ekonomi Islam, 1(01), 37–49. https://doi.org/10.29040/jiei.v1i01.6Patrikha, F. D. (2017). Pengaruh kelompok referensi, motif ekonomi dan pendidikan kewirausahaan di sekolah terhadap intensi berwirausaha siswa SMK di Kota Malang. Jurnal Ekonomi Pendidikan Dan Kewirausahaan, 3(2), 132. https://doi.org/10.26740/jepk.v3n2.p132-146Pindyck, R. S., & Rubinfeld, D. L. (2007). Mikro ekonomi (L. Henni (ed.); 6th ed.). Jakarta: PT Indeks.Ramadhan, A., & Gunanto, E. Y. A. (2021). Decision on halal certification of food and beverage products processed by UMKM Products in Tangerang City - Study of religiosity, regulation, and branding. Jurnal Ilmiah Ekonomi Islam, 7(2), 786–797. https://doi.org/10.29040/jiei.v7i2.2490Saaty, T. L., & Vergas, L. G. (2012). Models, methods, concepts & applications of the analytic hierarchy process. Second Edition (2nd ed.). New York: Springer.Setiadi, N. J. (2003). Perilaku konsumen: Konsep dan implikasi untuk strategi dan penelitian pemasaran (I). Jakarta: Prenada Media (kencana).Siswanto, A. (2016). The power of Islamic entrepreneurship: Energi kewirausahaan Islami (Abdurrahman & N. L. Nusroh (eds.); 1st ed.). Jakarta: Amzah.Stark, R., & Glock, C. Y. (1968). American piety: The nature of religious commitment. Los Angeles: University of California Press.State of the Global Islamic Economy Report. (2019). Memacu revolusi ekonomi Islam 4.0. Salaam Gateway. Diakses dari https://cdn.salaamgateway.com/special-coverage/sgie19-20/executive-summary+/SGIE+Bahasa+Executive+Summary.pdfState of the Global Islamic Economy Report. (2020). Thriving in uncertainty. Salaam Gateway, 1–209. Diakses dari https://cdn.salaamgateway.com/special-coverage/sgie19-20/full-report.pdfStatista. (2021). Fashion Indonesia: Statista market forecast. Diakses dari https://www.Statista.Com/Outlook/Dmo/Ecommerce/Fashion/Indonesia.Sugiyono. (2013). Metode penelitian kuantitatif, kualitatif dan R&D. Bandung: Alvabeta.Sukirno, S. (2016). Mikro ekonomi: Teori pengantar (3rd ed.). Jakarta: Rajawali Pers.Suryana. (2014). Kewirausahaan: Kiat dan proses menuju sukses (D. A. Halim (ed.); 4th ed.). Jakarta: Salemba Empat.Takdir, & Harfika. (2019). Teori perilaku produsen dalam ekonomi Islam dan ekonomi konvensional (Studi perbandingan). Journal of Institution and Sharia Finance, 2(1), 75–91. Diakses dari: https://ejournal.iainpalopo.ac.id/index.php/sharia_finance/article/viewFile/1390/1073Trihudiyatmanto, M. (2017). Pengaruh efikasi diri (Self efficacy) dan intensi berwirausaha terhadap spirit technopreneurship (Studi kasus di sentra pengrajin teralis di Desa Jlamprang Kecamatan Wonosobo). Jurnal Penelitian Dan Pengabdian Kepada Masyarakat UNSIQ, 4(2), 154–166. https://doi.org/10.32699/ppkm.v4i2.418Tuakia, H. (2018). Aplikasi syariat dalam bisnis. Akuntansi Bisnis & Manajemen ( ABM ), 25(1), 56. https://doi.org/10.35606/jabm.v25i1.351Veblen, T. (2005). The theory of the leisure class: An economic study of institutions. Delhi: Aakar Books.Warto, & Arif, Z. (2020). Bisnis produk halal antara peluang dan tantangan, problematika dan solusinya. Al-Ulum, 20(1), 274–294. https://doi.org/https://doi.org/10.30603/au.v20i1.1170 HalalYulia, Lady. (2015). Halal products industry development strategy strategi pengembangan industri produk halal. Jurnal Bisnis Islam, 8(1), 121–162. Diakes dari: https://jurnalbimasislam.kemenag.go.id/jbi/article/view/171/118Yusanto, M. I., & Widjajakusuma, M. K. (2002). Menggagas bisnis Islami (D. M. H. Basri (ed.); 1st ed.). Jakarta: Gema Insani.Yusuf, A. A., & Hamzah, A. (2016). Pengaruh kepercayaan diri dan semangat kewirausahaan terhadap minat menjadi wirausaha. Jurnal Ekonomi Dan Perbankan Syari’ah (Al-Amwal), 8(2), 481–490. Diakses dari http://repository.syekhnurjati.ac.id/id/eprint/4628
APA, Harvard, Vancouver, ISO, and other styles
28

Weiss, Michael J., Susan Scrivener, Austin Slaughter, and Benjamin Cohen. "An On-Ramp to Student Success: A Randomized Controlled Trial Evaluation of a Developmental Education Reform at the City University of New York." Educational Evaluation and Policy Analysis, May 3, 2021, 016237372110089. http://dx.doi.org/10.3102/01623737211008901.

Full text
Abstract:
Most community college students are referred to developmental education courses to build basic skills. These students often struggle in these courses and college more broadly. CUNY Start is a prematriculation program for students assessed as having significant remedial needs. CUNY Start students delay matriculation for one semester and receive time-intensive instruction in math, reading, and writing with a prescribed pedagogy delivered by trained teachers. The program aims to help students complete remediation and prepare for college-level courses. This article describes the results of an experiment at four community colleges (n ~ 3,800). We estimate that over 3 years, including one semester that students spent in the program and two-and-a-half years after the program was complete, CUNY Start substantially increased college readiness, slightly increased credit accumulation, and modestly increased graduation rates (by increasing participation in CUNY’s highly effective Accelerated Study in Associate Programs [ASAP]).
APA, Harvard, Vancouver, ISO, and other styles
29

Brien, Donna Lee. "Why Foodies Thrive in the Country: Mapping the Influence and Significance of the Rural and Regional Chef." M/C Journal 11, no. 5 (September 8, 2008). http://dx.doi.org/10.5204/mcj.83.

Full text
Abstract:
Introduction The academic area known as food studies—incorporating elements from disciplines including anthropology, folklore, history, sociology, gastronomy, and cultural studies as well as a range of multi-disciplinary approaches—asserts that cooking and eating practices are less a matter of nutrition (maintaining life by absorbing nutrients from food) and more a personal or group expression of various social and/or cultural actions, values or positions. The French philosopher, Michel de Certeau agrees, arguing, moreover, that there is an urgency to name and unpick (what he identifies as) the “minor” practices, the “multifarious and silent reserve of procedures” of everyday life. Such practices are of crucial importance to all of us, as although seemingly ordinary, and even banal, they have the ability to “organise” our lives (48). Within such a context, the following aims to consider the influence and significance of an important (although largely unstudied) professional figure in rural and regional economic life: the country food preparer variously known as the local chef or cook. Such an approach is obviously framed by the concept of “cultural economy”. This term recognises the convergence, and interdependence, of the spheres of the cultural and the economic (see Scott 335, for an influential discussion on how “the cultural geography of space and the economic geography of production are intertwined”). Utilising this concept in relation to chefs and cooks seeks to highlight how the ways these figures organise (to use de Certeau’s term) the social and cultural lives of those in their communities are embedded in economic practices and also how, in turn, their economic contributions are dependent upon social and cultural practices. This initial mapping of the influence and significance of the rural and regional chef in one rural and regional area, therefore, although necessarily different in approach and content, continues the application of such converged conceptualisations of the cultural and economic as Teema Tairu’s discussion of the social, recreational and spiritual importance of food preparation and consumption by the unemployed in Finland, Guy Redden’s exploration of how supermarket products reflect shared values, and a series of analyses of the cultural significance of individual food products, such as Richard White’s study of vegemite. While Australians, both urban and rural, currently enjoy access to an internationally renowned food culture, it is remarkable to consider that it has only been during the years following the Second World War that these sophisticated and now much emulated ways of eating and cooking have developed. It is, indeed, only during the last half century that Australian eating habits have shifted from largely Anglo-Saxon influenced foods and meals that were prepared and eaten in the home, to the consumption of a wider range of more international and sophisticated foods and meals that are, increasingly, prepared by others and eaten outside the consumer’s residence. While a range of commonly cited influences has prompted this relatively recent revolution in culinary practice—including post-war migration, increasing levels of prosperity, widespread international travel, and the forces of globalisation—some of this change owes a debt to a series of influential individual figures. These tastemakers have included food writers and celebrity chefs; with early exponents including Margaret Fulton, Graham Kerr and Charmaine Solomon (see Brien). The findings of this study suggests that many restaurant chefs, and other cooks, have similarly played, and continue to take, a key role in the lives of not only the, necessarily, limited numbers of individuals who dine in a particular eatery or the other chefs and/or cooks trained in that establishment (Ruhlman, Reach), but also the communities in which they work on a much broader scale. Considering Chefs In his groundbreaking study, A History of Cooks and Cooking, Australian food historian Michael Symons proposes that those who prepare food are worthy of serious consideration because “if ‘we are what we eat’, cooks have not just made our meals, but have also made us. They have shaped our social networks, our technologies, arts and religions” (xi). Writing that cooks “deserve to have their stories told often and well,” and that, moreover, there is a “need to invent ways to think about them, and to revise our views about ourselves in their light” (xi), Symons’s is a clarion call to investigate the role and influence of cooks. Charles-Allen Baker-Clark has explicitly begun to address this lacunae in his Profiles from the Kitchen: What Great Cooks Have Taught Us About Ourselves and Our Food (2006), positing not only how these figures have shaped our relationships with food and eating, but also how these relationships impact on identities, culture and a range of social issues including those of social justice, spirituality and environmental sustainability. With the growing public interest in celebrities, it is perhaps not surprising that, while such research on chefs and/or cooks is still in its infancy, most of the existing detailed studies on individuals focus on famed international figures such as Marie-Antoine Carême (Bernier; Kelly), Escoffier (James; Rachleff; Sanger), and Alexis Soyer (Brandon; Morris; Ray). Despite an increasing number of tabloid “tell-all” surveys of contemporary celebrity chefs, which are largely based on mass media sources and which display little concern for historical or biographical accuracy (Bowyer; Hildred and Ewbank; Simpson; Smith), there have been to date only a handful of “serious” researched biographies of contemporary international chefs such as Julia Child, Alice Waters (Reardon; Riley), and Bernard Loiseux (Chelminski)—the last perhaps precipitated by an increased interest in this chef following his suicide after his restaurant lost one of its Michelin stars. Despite a handful of collective biographical studies of Australian chefs from the later-1980s on (Jenkins; O’Donnell and Knox; Brien), there are even fewer sustained biographical studies of Australian chefs or cooks (Clifford-Smith’s 2004 study of “the supermarket chef,” Bernard King, is a notable exception). Throughout such investigations, as well as in other popular food writing in magazines and cookbooks, there is some recognition that influential chefs and cooks have worked, and continue to work, outside such renowned urban culinary centres as Paris, London, New York, and Sydney. The Michelin starred restaurants of rural France, the so-called “gastropubs” of rural Britain and the advent of the “star-chef”-led country bed and breakfast establishment in Australia and New Zealand, together with the proliferation of farmer’s markets and a public desire to consume locally sourced, and ecologically sustainable, produce (Nabhan), has focused fresh attention on what could be called “the rural/regional chef”. However, despite the above, little attention has focused on the Australian non-urban chef/cook outside of the pages of a small number of key food writing magazines such as Australian Gourmet Traveller and Vogue Entertaining + Travel. Setting the Scene with an Australian Country Example: Armidale and Guyra In 2004, the Armidale-Dumaresq Council (of the New England region, New South Wales, Australia) adopted the slogan “Foodies thrive in Armidale” to market its main city for the next three years. With a population of some 20,000, Armidale’s main industry (in economic terms) is actually education and related services, but the latest Tourist Information Centre’s Dining Out in Armidale (c. 2006) brochure lists some 25 restaurants, 9 bistros and brasseries, 19 cafés and 5 fast food outlets featuring Australian, French, Italian, Mediterranean, Chinese, Thai, Indian and “international” cuisines. The local Yellow Pages telephone listings swell the estimation of the total number of food-providing businesses in the city to 60. Alongside the range of cuisines cited above, a large number of these eateries foreground the use of fresh, local foods with such phrases as “local and regional produce,” “fresh locally grown produce,” “the finest New England ingredients” and locally sourced “New England steaks, lamb and fresh seafood” repeatedly utilised in advertising and other promotional material. Some thirty kilometres to the north along the New England highway, the country town of Guyra, proclaimed a town in 1885, is the administrative and retail centre for a shire of some 2,200 people. Situated at 1,325 metres above sea level, the town is one of the highest in Australia with its main industries those of fine wool and lamb, beef cattle, potatoes and tomatoes. Until 1996, Guyra had been home to a large regional abattoir that employed some 400 staff at the height of its productivity, but rationalisation of the meat processing industry closed the facility, together with its associated pet food processor, causing a downturn in employment, local retail business, and real estate values. Since 2004, Guyra’s economy has, however, begun to recover after the town was identified by the Costa Group as the perfect site for glasshouse grown tomatoes. Perfect, due to its rare combination of cool summers (with an average of less than two days per year with temperatures over 30 degrees celsius), high winter light levels and proximity to transport routes. The result: 3.3 million kilograms of truss, vine harvested, hydroponic “Top of the Range” tomatoes currently produced per annum, all year round, in Guyra’s 5-hectare glasshouse: Australia’s largest, opened in December 2005. What residents (of whom I am one) call the “tomato-led recovery” has generated some 60 new local jobs directly related to the business, and significant flow on effects in terms of the demand for local services and retail business. This has led to substantial rates of renovation and building of new residential and retail properties, and a noticeably higher level of trade flowing into the town. Guyra’s main street retail sector is currently burgeoning and stories of its renewal have appeared in the national press. Unlike many similar sized inland towns, there are only a handful of empty shops (and most of these are in the process of being renovated), and new commercial premises have recently been constructed and opened for business. Although a small town, even in Australian country town terms, Guyra now has 10 restaurants, hotel bistros and cafés. A number of these feature local foods, with one pub’s bistro regularly featuring the trout that is farmed just kilometres away. Assessing the Contribution of Local Chefs and Cooks In mid-2007, a pilot survey to begin to explore the contribution of the regional chef in these two close, but quite distinct, rural and regional areas was sent to the chefs/cooks of the 70 food-serving businesses in Armidale and Guyra that I could identify. Taking into account the 6 returns that revealed a business had closed, moved or changed its name, the 42 replies received represented a response rate of 65.5per cent (or two thirds), representatively spread across the two towns. Answers indicated that the businesses comprised 18 restaurants, 13 cafés, 6 bistro/brasseries, 1 roadhouse, 1 takeaway/fast food and 3 bed and breakfast establishments. These businesses employed 394 staff, of whom 102 were chefs and/cooks, or 25.9 per cent of the total number of staff then employed by these establishments. In answer to a series of questions designed to ascertain the roles played by these chefs/cooks in their local communities, as well as more widely, I found a wide range of inputs. These chefs had, for instance, made a considerable contribution to their local economies in the area of fostering local jobs and a work culture: 40 (95 per cent) had worked with/for another local business including but not exclusively food businesses; 30 (71.4 per cent) had provided work experience opportunities for those aspiring to work in the culinary field; and 22 (more than half) had provided at least one apprenticeship position. A large number had brought outside expertise and knowledge with them to these local areas, with 29 (69 per cent) having worked in another food business outside Armidale or Guyra. In terms of community building and sustainability, 10 (or almost a quarter) had assisted or advised the local Council; 20 (or almost half) had worked with local school children in a food-related way; 28 (two thirds) had helped at least one charity or other local fundraising group. An extra 7 (bringing the cumulative total to 83.3 per cent) specifically mentioned that they had worked with/for the local gallery, museum and/or local history group. 23 (more than half) had been involved with and/or contributed to a local festival. The question of whether they had “contributed anything else important, helpful or interesting to the community” elicited the following responses: writing a food or wine column for the local paper (3 respondents), delivering TAFE teacher workshops (2 respondents), holding food demonstrations for Rotary and Lions Clubs and school fetes (5 respondents), informing the public about healthy food (3 respondents), educating the public about environmental issues (2 respondents) and working regularly with Meals on Wheels or a similar organisation (6 respondents, or 14.3 per cent). One respondent added his/her work as a volunteer driver for the local ambulance transport service, the only non-food related response to this question. Interestingly, in line with the activity of well-known celebrity chefs, in addition to the 3 chefs/cooks who had written a food or wine column for the local newspaper, 11 respondents (more than a quarter of the sample) had written or contributed to a cookbook or recipe collection. One of these chefs/cooks, moreover, reported that he/she produced a weblog that was “widely read”, and also contributed to international food-related weblogs and websites. In turn, the responses indicated that the (local) communities—including their governing bodies—also offer some support of these chefs and cooks. Many respondents reported they had been featured in, or interviewed and/or photographed for, a range of media. This media comprised the following: the local newspapers (22 respondents, 52.4 per cent), local radio stations (19 respondents, 45.2 per cent), regional television stations (11 respondents, 26.2 per cent) and local websites (8 respondents, 19 per cent). A number had also attracted other media exposure. This was in the local, regional area, especially through local Council publications (31 respondents, 75 per cent), as well as state-wide (2 respondents, 4.8 per cent) and nationally (6 respondents, 14.3 per cent). Two of these local chefs/cooks (or 4.8 per cent) had attracted international media coverage of their activities. It is clear from the above that, in the small area surveyed, rural and regional chefs/cooks make a considerable contribution to their local communities, with all the chefs/cooks who replied making some, and a number a major, contribution to those communities, well beyond the requirements of their paid positions in the field of food preparation and service. The responses tendered indicate that these chefs and cooks contributed regularly to local public events, institutions and charities (with a high rate of contribution to local festivals, school programs and local charitable activities), and were also making an input into public education programs, local cultural institutions, political and social debates of local importance, as well as the profitability of other local businesses. They were also actively supporting not only the future of the food industry as a whole, but also the viability of their local communities, by providing work experience opportunities and taking on local apprentices for training and mentorship. Much more than merely food providers, as a group, these chefs and cooks were, it appears, also operating as food historians, public intellectuals, teachers, activists and environmentalists. They were, moreover, operating as content producers for local media while, at the same time, acting as media producers and publishers. Conclusion The terms “chef” and “cook” can be diversely defined. All definitions, however, commonly involve a sense of professionalism in food preparation reflecting some specialist knowledge and skill in the culinary arts, as well as various levels of creativity, experience and responsibility. In terms of the specific duties that chefs and professional cooks undertake every day, almost all publications on the subject deal specifically with workplace related activities such as food and other supply ordering, staff management, menu planning and food preparation and serving. This is constant across culinary textbooks (see, for instance, Culinary Institute of America 2002) and more discursive narratives about the professional chef such as the bestselling autobiographical musings of Anthony Bourdain, and Michael Ruhlman’s journalistic/biographical investigations of US chefs (Soul; Reach). An alternative preliminary examination, and categorisation, of the roles these professionals play outside their kitchens reveals, however, a much wider range of community based activities and inputs than such texts suggest. It is without doubt that the chefs and cooks who responded to the survey discussed above have made, and are making, a considerable contribution to their local New England communities. It is also without doubt that these contributions are of considerable value, and valued by, those country communities. Further research will have to consider to what extent these contributions, and the significance and influence of these chefs and cooks in those communities are mirrored, or not, by other country (as well as urban) chefs and cooks, and their communities. Acknowledgements An earlier version of this paper was presented at the Engaging Histories: Australian Historical Association Regional Conference, at the University of New England, September 2007. I would like to thank the session’s participants for their insightful comments on that presentation. A sincere thank you, too, to the reviewers of this article, whose suggestions assisted my thinking on this piece. Research to complete this article was carried out whilst a Visiting Fellow with the Research School of Humanities, the Australian National University. References Armidale Tourist Information Centre. Dining Out in Armidale [brochure]. Armidale: Armidale-Dumaresq Council, c. 2006. Baker-Clark, C. A. Profiles from the Kitchen: What Great Cooks have Taught us about Ourselves and our Food. Lexington: UP of Kentucky, 2006. Bernier, G. Antoine Carême 1783-1833: La Sensualité Gourmande en Europe. Paris: Grasset, 1989. Bourdain, A. Kitchen Confidential: Adventures in the Culinary Underbelly. New York: Harper Perennial, 2001. Bowyer, A. Delia Smith: The Biography. London: André Deutsch, 1999. Brandon, R. The People’s Chef: Alexis Soyer, A Life in Seven Courses. Chichester: Wiley, 2005. Brien, D. L. “Australian Celebrity Chefs 1950-1980: A Preliminary Study.” Australian Folklore 21 (2006): 201–18. Chelminski, R. The Perfectionist: Life and Death In Haute Cuisine. New York: Gotham Books, 2005. Clifford-Smith, S. A Marvellous Party: The Life of Bernard King. Milson’s Point: Random House Australia, 2004. Culinary Institute of America. The Professional Chef. 7th ed. New York: Wiley, 2002. de Certeau, M. The Practice of Everyday Life. Berkeley: U of California P, 1988. Hildred, S., and T. Ewbank. Jamie Oliver: The Biography. London: Blake, 2001. Jenkins, S. 21 Great Chefs of Australia: The Coming of Age of Australian Cuisine. East Roseville: Simon and Schuster, 1991. Kelly, I. Cooking for Kings: The Life of Antoine Carême, The First Celebrity Chef. New York: Walker and Company, 2003. James, K. Escoffier: The King of Chefs. London and New York: Hambledon and London, 2002. Morris, H. Portrait of a Chef: The Life of Alexis Soyer, Sometime Chef to the Reform Club. Cambridge: Cambridge UP, 1938. Nabhan, G. P. Coming Home to Eat: The Pleasures and Politics of Local Foods. New York: W.W. Norton, 2002. O’Donnell, M., and T. Knox. Great Australian Chefs. Melbourne: Bookman Press, 1999. Rachleff, O. S. Escoffier: King of Chefs. New York: Broadway Play Pub., 1983. Ray, E. Alexis Soyer: Cook Extraordinary. Lewes: Southover, 1991. Reardon, J. M. F. K. Fisher, Julia Child, and Alice Waters: Celebrating the Pleasures of the Table. New York: Harmony Books, 1994. Redden, G. “Packaging the Gifts of Nation.” M/C: A Journal of Media and Culture 2.7 (1999) accessed 10 September 2008 http://www.uq.edu.au/mc/9910/gifts.php. Riley, N. Appetite For Life: The Biography of Julia Child. New York: Doubleday, 1977. Ruhlman, M. The Soul of a Chef. New York: Viking, 2001. Ruhlman, M. The Reach of a Chef. New York: Viking, 2006. Sanger, M. B. Escoffier: Master Chef. New York: Farrar Straus Giroux, 1976. Scott, A. J. “The Cultural Economy of Cities.” International Journal of Urban and Regional Research 212 (1997) 323–39. Simpson, N. Gordon Ramsay: The Biography. London: John Blake, 2006. Smith, G. Nigella Lawson: A Biography. London: Andre Deutsch, 2005. Symons, M. A History of Cooks and Cooking. Urbana and Chicago: U of Illinois P, 2004. Tairu, T. “Material Food, Spiritual Quest: When Pleasure Does Not Follow Purchase.” M/C: A Journal of Media and Culture 2.7 (1999) accessed 10 September 2008 http://www.uq.edu.au/mc/9910/pleasure.php. White, R. S. “Popular Culture as the Everyday: A Brief Cultural History of Vegemite.” Australian Popular Culture. Ed. I. Craven. Cambridge UP, 1994. 15–21.
APA, Harvard, Vancouver, ISO, and other styles
30

BEASLEY, J. M., M. A. SEVICK, L. KIRSHNER, M. MANGOLD, and J. CHODOSH. "CONGREGATE MEALS: OPPORTUNITIES TO HELP VULNERABLE OLDER ADULTS ACHIEVE DIET AND PHYSICAL ACTIVITY RECOMMENDATIONS." Journal of Frailty & Aging, 2018, 1–5. http://dx.doi.org/10.14283/jfa.2018.21.

Full text
Abstract:
Background: Through diet and exercise interventions, community centers offer an opportunity to address health-related issues for some of the oldest, most vulnerable members of our society. Objectives: The purpose of this investigation is to draw upon nationwide data to better characterize the population served by the congregate meals program and to gather more detailed information on a local level to identify opportunities for service enhancement to improve the health and well-being of older adults. Design: We examined community center data from two sources: 2015 National Survey of Older Americans Act and surveys from two New York City community centers. To assess nationwide service delivery, we analyzed participant demographics, functional status defined by activities of daily living, and perceptions of services received. Measurements: Participants from the two New York City community centers completed a four-day food record. Functional measures included the short physical performance battery, self-reported physical function, grip strength, and the Montreal Cognitive Assessment. Results: Nationwide (n=901), most participants rated the meal quality as good to excellent (91.7%), and would recommend the congregate meals program to a friend (96.0%). Local level data (n=22) were collected for an in-depth understanding of diet, physical activity patterns, body weight, and objective functional status measures. Diets of this small, local convenience sample were higher in fat, cholesterol, and sodium, and lower in calcium, magnesium, and fiber than recommended by current United States Dietary Guidelines. Average time engaged in moderate physical activity was 254 minutes per week (SD=227), exceeding the recommended 150 minutes per week, but just 41% (n=9) and 50% (n=11) of participants engaged in strength or balance exercises, respectively. Conclusion: Research is warranted to test whether improvements in the nutritional quality of food served and access/supports for engaging in strength training within community centers could help older adults achieve diet and physical activity recommendations.
APA, Harvard, Vancouver, ISO, and other styles
31

Figueroa, Roger, Katherine Baker, Joel Capellan, Laura C. Pinheiro, Laura Burd, Jane Lim, Reah Chiong, Relicious Eboh, and Erica Phillips. "Residential urban food environment profiles and diet outcomes among adults in Brooklyn, New York: A cross-sectional study." Public Health Nutrition, November 17, 2022, 1–25. http://dx.doi.org/10.1017/s1368980022002476.

Full text
Abstract:
Abstract Objective: To assess the clustering properties of residential urban food environment indicators across neighborhoods and to determine if clustering profiles are associated with diet outcomes among adults in Brooklyn, New York. Design: Cross-sectional. Setting: Five neighborhoods in Brooklyn, New York. Participants: Survey data (n=1,493) was collected among adults in Brooklyn, New York between April 2019 and September 2019. Data for food environment indicators (fast-food restaurants, bodegas, supermarkets, farmer’s markets, community kitchens, Supplemental Nutrition Assistance Program (SNAP) application centers, food pantries) was drawn from New York databases. Latent profile analysis (LPA) was used to identify individuals’ food access-related profiles, based on food environments measured by the availability of each outlet within each participant’s 800-meter buffer. Profile memberships were associated with dietary outcomes using mixed linear regression. Results: LPA identified four residential urban food environment profiles (with significant-high clusters ranging from 17-57 across profiles): Limited/low food access, (n = 587), bodega-dense (n = 140), food swamp (n = 254), and high food access (n = 512) profiles. Diet outcomes were not statistically different across identified profiles. Only participants in the limited/low food access profile were more likely to consume sugar-sweetened beverages (SSB) than those in the bodega-dense profile (b = .44, p < 0.05) in adjusted models. Conclusions: Individuals in limited and low food access neighborhoods are vulnerable to consuming significant amounts of SSBs compared to those in bodega-dense communities. Further research is warranted to elucidate strategies to improve fruit and vegetable consumption while reducing SSB intake within residential urban food environments.
APA, Harvard, Vancouver, ISO, and other styles
32

Huh, Jina, and Mark S. Ackerman. "Obsolescence: Uncovering Values in Technology Use." M/C Journal 12, no. 3 (July 15, 2009). http://dx.doi.org/10.5204/mcj.157.

Full text
Abstract:
Obsolescence in Conversation Knick-knacks of uncertain use,[Omitted for space]Somber pictures and distant blues,Faded pastels, hard cameos,Phials still smelling of perfume,Jewelry, rags, rattles, puppets,What a great clutter in this chest!All for sale. Accept my offer,Reader. Perhaps these old thingsWill move you to tears or laughter.You’ll have to pay, and as for me,I shall buy some nice fresh roses. (Cros and Corbière) Orlando, in his book Obsolete Objects in the Literary Imagination, interprets the listing of the objects in this sonnet as intensifying “the primary defunctionalization of the things” (18). Until line 5, the old objects in the chest seemed to bring good reminiscence. In line 6, on the contrary, these objects suddenly turn into “great clutter”, which needs to be sold in order to be replaced with “some nice fresh roses”. This is a representative example of how obsolescence is construed in our everyday lives. Obsolete objects bring memories, warmth, and nostalgia, yet we often view them as the defunctionalized, impractical, uncertain, or worthless that will eventually have to be replaced with the new. When it comes to technological objects, functionality, efficiency, and usefulness are the central reasons for their existence. Accordingly, becoming obsolete poses a great challenge towards the reason for their existence, raising our perception about obsolete technology as a waste. Strasser (Strasser) wrote in the 1920s — “economic growth was fueled by what had once been understood as waste.” This notion carries over to today’s computing environment in which the high rate of machine turnover translates into tremendous profitability for the computing industries. Hence planned obsolescence, planning and engineering the obsolescence, became a long-established principle in American consumer economics (Sterne). The ways in which computing devices are designed today are good resulting representations of planned obsolescence. A study in 2007 showed that American consumers use their phones for only 17.5 months before replacing them (U.S. Wireless Mobile Phone Evaluation Study), and worldwide sales of mobile phones are expected to exceed one billion by 2009 (Gartner). Huang and Truong called the trend of usage lifetime being much shorter than their functional lifetime the disposable technology paradigm. As environmental sustainability became an important issue in our daily lives, the awareness of planned obsolescence and the disposable technology paradigm alarmed researchers to actively engage in the questions of supporting sustainability in computing devices. Because of the notion that obsolescence equals waste, the conversations in designing for sustainability have been based on the view that obsolescence is something that is problematic and need to be prevented. For example, sustainable interaction design (Blevis) suggested ways in which design can prolong the life cycle of the product in order to delay or prevent the product from becoming obsolete. So far we have discussed how the notion of obsolescence is perceived in our everyday lives, what it means to the computing industry, and how it is utilized for economic profit or, in contrary, attempted to be prevented for environmental sustainability. Rather than viewing obsolescence as having negative power, however, we challenge the notion that obsolescence is worthless and furthermore discuss the social and individual values that were surfaced through a case study of a user community that maintained an obsolete machine for over nine years after the product’s discontinuation. HP200LX User Community HP200LX (LX) is a PDA introduced by HP in 1994. It is MS-DOS compatible and comes with 2 or 4 MB of memory including the RAM. Housed in a clamshell-style case, it comes with 640x200 monochrome display, QWERTY keyboard, serial port, and PCMCIA slot. A user claimed that an AA battery would run his LX for up to two weeks. The user community for the LX communicated and shared information through an email list. The email list started in late 1996 and thrived until September 2008. By January of 2008, there were approximately 90,000 accumulated messages that were archived online since 1996. We sampled roughly 35,000 messages from the beginning of the archive, around discontinuation (November, 1999), and later in the archive, and analyzed using standard qualitative analysis through coding and probed for emerging patterns. The LX was discontinued in 1999, officially making the LX to be obsolete. To the LX users, however, the LX was more effective than any other PDAs at the time. Because the LX was running DOS, it allowed the users to flexibly develop and share custom applications that fit their everyday practices. Besides, the LX users considered the LX useful due to it being lightweight and having long lasting battery life. In the attempt to push back against the obsolescence of the machine, during the first few years after discontinuation, the LX user community was actively building resources that would help prolong the life of the rapidly aging LX. This included solutions in dealing with fixing and upgrading hardware and software, adding new features, and maintaining compatibility with the surrounding computing environment. For example, the members shared their know-hows on fixing broken hinges or finding the right memory card that communicated the best with the LX. As well, a user developed a do-it-yourself kit that allowed end users to install backlight to the LX, which was not an existing feature in the original LX. Actively Participating in Building Up the Resources Around the time the LX was discontinued, the LX community was pushing back against the notion of obsolescence that was given to the LX. The LX was still useful to them and they could not find the alternatives that would replace the kinds of functionalities and features that the LX provided. Accordingly, it was up to the members themselves to maintain the LX, which required active participation from the members. The core members of the list shared the knowledge they had accumulated while using the LX. If a member asked a question to the email list, a variety of solutions was followed. This way, over many years, the community had collectively built up resources that were necessary in order for the LX users to maintain the LX on their own. In 2001, a member volunteered to aggregate members’ contact information and their core knowledge skills in maintaining the LX. He wanted to use the database for the newcomers and for those who will continue to use the LX long after the list died when the resources would no longer be available: “…we could create a database which all people who are so kind to support the HPLX community even after they leave the list (if ever) can add their contact information and a short HPLX-related skills profile, so that, when you have a s[p]ecific problem with (for example) an Internet connection with cel[l] phone you simply do a search for "cell phone" and it appears, besides others, the entryname: [David Wong]email: [dw]@epost.deURL: www.[david-wong].deskills: cell phones, LaTeX, Synchronization, serial port,.....”(User EI, Sep. 2001) The responses were favorable, showing that the members valued participation as an important part of sustaining the community and the obsolete machine. A few months later, in February 2002, a member suggested the list to introduce themselves to the list in 80 minutes. The thread continued for about a month from users around the world: [Stanley Bower], New ZealandOwner of one well travelled single speed unit featuring a Hinge Crack and a rubber band modified latch. (User TG, Jan. 2002) [Dan], I hail from Los Angeles, CA, originally from Roseburg, Oregon. USA All the Way! I posted several months ago a suggestion that we set up an HPLX conference to get everyone on the list in a convenient location. Anyone else interested? [John Bulard] (User KC, Feb. 2002) 105 members have responded to the thread. Then user EI suggested to merge the contact information gathered from this email thread to the knowledge database. Currently, the database is offline due to privacy concerns, but this event showed how much the list was conscientious about using the collective knowledge for those who need help in maintaining the obsolete machine that essentially have little resources to depend on. The fact that the LX was obsolete pushed users to actively engage in collectively building resources for maintaining the LX. Unveiling Invisible Collective Creativity Because of the members’ active participation, it also unveiled the creativity of the members in getting around the problems that were created due to the obsolescence. For example, reading a PDF file on the LX was a big issue since existing DOS based PDF readers required higher system requirements than the LX. Accordingly, the members had to come up with their own ways of reading PDF files, and these were shared on the email list starting 1998 through 2005. In February 1999, user UP suggested printing PDF files from a fax driver and reading the output from the fax viewer. However, this fax viewer solution did not seem to get much attention. Instead, user EO followed up saying that some PDF files could be read directly without the viewer while others do not. Because this solution had uncertainties, his second suggestion was to convert PDF files into images from other computers and import them into the LX. From this point on, the members discussed a variety of ways in which PDF files could be read. The members found downloadable programs that could convert PDF files to .TXT or ASCII files as well as email addresses to which the members could send PDF files and receive text files back. In March 2001, a member introduced using Google to open PDF file as a text file and downloading the HTML file to the LX. Later, instead of the PDF to TXT or HTML solution, user CN shared his know-how of viewing PDF files through image capture: you can open it in Acrobat on your desktop, capture a screenshot to your clipboard (I think on a Windows box you press PrtScrn), then trim it neatly in a graphics program before saving the image to .pcx or some other format. Then you can view it in LXPic on your palmtop. It's easier than it sounds. (User CN, Jul. 2001) In April 2005, a member distributed an application that converted PDF files directly into the image files. Another member then complained about the size of the resulting image file, which he then solved through manually getting rid of the white bordering around the text. The LX users were constantly adapting their own ways of solving problems. Aside from viewing PDF files problem, there were many other challenges such as breaking hardware and outdating software that the users had to deal with. However, this very process of overcoming the LX becoming obsolete and losing compatibility with the advancing computing environment has unveiled the collective creativity of the LX users that would otherwise have been hidden. Becoming Well-Informed Even with active knowledge sharing and creative work-arounds, maintaining the LX was still challenging. Accordingly, the members had to constantly look out for alternatives that could replace the LX: I just picked up one of these beasties [Zaurus] at HSN.COM for $180-ish shipped. I was wondering if I could get some feedback from anyone who has used it and can compare/contrast with an LX. There are obvious differences in battery life, color, etc but I was wondering about built-in applications. So far this thing seems like a good alternative for those who want a "modern" color PDA but find PocketWindows too bloated and PalmOS too primitive. The coolest part is that you can use the SD slot form flash mem and the CF slot for ethernet or other periph. (User F, Mar. 2003) During the course of researching the alternatives and sharing experiences on the list, the members became well-informed about the alternative products and their pros and cons of the detailed aspects. Examples included how keyboard touch feels, what available customized as well as built-in applications are, how easy it is to back up, how long the battery life is, or what daily usage practices are. Because the LX was an intricate part of the members’ lives, daily resources and practices were built around the LX, making it one of the impeding factors for the LX users to move on to an alternative device. Thus, it was important to know the degree to which the alternative device can continue to support the workflow that was established around the LX. This forced the members to actively engage in conversations to be well informed about alternative devices beyond features and machine performances. As a result, the members became well aware of the choices they have as consumers and perceived themselves to be able to make well-informed decisions than other general consumer groups. Co-Construction of Group Identity Because the members became well-informed consumers and the LX was not something that anybody could use (it required minimum programming knowledge), the members begun to distance themselves apart from the general group of users. HP200LX becoming abandoned in place of a new mobile platform WinCE, which was supposedly user-friendlier than DOS, pushed the members even further away from “the normal users”, which opened up another space for the LX users to co-construct their group identity. Here is an exemplary conversation thread in which user BN responds to user TE: › HP are NOT making a big mistake by discontinuing the 200LX any more › than your girlfiend was whe[n] she dumped you for the nerd with pots › of money.Yeah, yeah, we react like the dumped boyfriend. But hey, rejection is tough. :)› It's their choice and their problem. _We_ don't have a problem.A little yes… (User BN, July 1999) Notice here how user BN and TE refer to the list members as “we” who react to the discontinuation like the dumped boyfriend, and HP as “they” who abandoned the LX over the new mobile platform. Similarly, in the following, by grouping the users “these days” that buy “crappy computer hardware and software”, user TE contrasts the LX users from the general group of users and characterizes the LX users as those who make informed decisions: They [the companies] don't care if the machines are a pain in the butt and the users are frustrated. These days, users are willing to accept crappy computer hardware and software... (User TE, 1999) However, another user argued that the general group of users, in fact, prefers WinCE or computing devices that they consider “crappy”, placing themselves further away from the general users: No, no, no. They [users] love that [WinCE]. There's nothing better than a big installed base who thin[k]s that a bug fix is properly referred to as an "upgrade." (User MD, 1999) Watkins, in his book Throwaways (Watkins), argued that distancing between the new and the old gave a means of maintaining dominance through distinction from others. For example, rather than being viewed as true progression, to Watkins, avant-gardism was merely another means of social distinction, a way to stay one step ahead. In the case of the LX community, the use of old, instead of the new, has been placed as their ways of staying techno-culturally one step ahead. This process of social distinction played an important part in the formation of the group identity, which in turn tightened the community and brought them closer together. Obsolescence Uncovers Values in Technology Use When we picture obsolete computers, they are dusted, big, heavy, slow, and clunky – they are perceived to have little ability to perform as newer computers do. However, obsolescence is such a situated notion that it may be construed arbitrarily depending on how, to whom, and when an object becomes obsolete. Although planned obsolescence may reclassify a machine as obsolete, its actual disuse may come later. Even if the disuse occurs, again, throwing away may happen later. The LX community showed a representative example of the constant re-interpretation of the obsolescence through the tight tension between reclassification of the LX as obsolete by the corporate and perceived obsolescence by the end-users. For the LX users, the LX was not obsolete – it was still the most functional device they could find at the time. The LX users were then committed to maintain the LX over eight years after discontinuation, challenging the notion of obsolete computers as worthless. The LX users maintained the obsolete machine not solely because of the nostalgic purposes but arguably because of the quality and functionality the machine possessed. In fact, the LX community was merely a representative of many user communities of discontinued computing artifacts (Muniz Jr. and Schau, Frauenfelder) that could attest to the arbitrary notion of obsolescence. The constant tension between the forced obsolescence and the refusal towards obsolescence, in return, allowed the LX community to discover values that may not otherwise have been revealed. In the process of pushing back the notion that the LX is obsolete, the community was able to bring to the surface the active participation of the community, the hidden forms of collective creativity, constant efforts in becoming well informed, and the formation of group identity. References Blevis, E. "Sustainable Interaction Design: Invention & Disposal, Renewal & Reuse." ACM CHI New York, 2007. Cros, Charles, and Tristan Corbière. Œuvres Complètes [de] Charles Cros [et] Tristan Corbière. Bibliothèque de La Pléiade. Paris: Gallimard, 1970. Frauenfelder, M. "Never Say Die." Wired March 2000. Gartner. "Gartner Says Mobile Phone Sales Will Exceed One Billion in 2009." 2005. 15 July 2009 ‹http://www.gartner.com/press_releases/asset_132473_11.html›. Huang, E.M., and K.N. Truong. "Sustainably Ours - Situated Sustainability for Mobile Phones." Interactions-New York 15.2 (2008): 16-19. Muniz Jr., A.M., and H.J. Schau. "Religiosity in the Abandoned Apple Newton Brand Community." Journal of Consumer Research 31.4 (2005): 737-47. Orlando, Francesco. Obsolete Objects in the Literary Imagination : Ruins, Relics, Rarities, Rubbish, Uninhabited Places, and Hidden Treasures. New Haven: Yale University Press, 2006. Sterne, Jonathan. "Out with the Trash: On the Future of New Media." Residual Media. Ed. Charles R. Acland. Illustrated ed. Minneapolis: University of Minessota Press, 2007. 16-31. Strasser, Susan. Waste and Want: A Social History of Trash. 1st ed. New York: Metropolitan Books, 1999. U.S. Wireless Mobile Phone Evaluation Study. J.D. Power and Associates, 2007. Watkins, E. Throwaways: Work Culture and Consumer Education. Stanford University Press, 1993.
APA, Harvard, Vancouver, ISO, and other styles
33

Reddy, Bharathi, Nancy Rullo, Kiseok Lee, John P. Nicholson, and Donna C. Candy. "Abstract P253: Ethnic Disparities in Referral to and Enrollment Among Patients in Cardiac Rehabilitation." Circulation: Cardiovascular Quality and Outcomes 4, suppl_1 (November 2011). http://dx.doi.org/10.1161/circoutcomes.4.suppl_1.ap253.

Full text
Abstract:
Background: Despite the convincing evidence and practice guidelines for cardiac rehabilitation (CR), it has been consistently documented that 20% of eligible patients actually enroll in CR. Studies have shown multiple reasons for this non-utilization, but few have documented enrollment ethnicity differences. Objective: The purpose of this study is to document ethnic disparities deter enrollment of patients to CR. We speculate that maybe ethnic, cultural, and language are barriers to enrollment into CR. Methods: The study sample comprised of five hundred ninety-six adult patients (age 65.47 ± 12.02) discharged from New York Hospital Queens, community-based hospital serving a multi-diverse population in Queens, New York following acute myocardial infarction (MI), percutaneous coronary intervention (PCI), and/or coronary artery bypass surgery (CABS) in the year 2009. All patients were referred through liaison referral. Data was obtained from the Register database (gender, age, clinical information). Results: Of the 596 patients referred to our CR program, one hundred five patients (17.5%) enrolled in CR. Of the total number of patients referred (n= 596), Asian (n=177, 29.7%), Caucasians (n=246, 41.3%); African Americans (n=49, 8%), Hispanics (n=107 18%), Others (American Indian, Middle-Eastern, etc.) (n=17, 3%), significant disparities among the ethnic groups were noted respectively, Asian (n=14, 7.9%), Caucasian (n= 51, 20.7%), African-American (n=17, 34.7%), Hispanic (22, 20.6%), and Others (n=1, 5.9%). The most remarkable and profound difference was in the Asians enrolled (7.9%, 14/77). This was in sharp contrast as compared to the other ethnic groups enrolled into CR. Conclusions: The results show substantially lower levels of CR participation among Asians. We surmise that language barriers, ethnic and cultural perceptions, and physician referral patterns in Asians, may be among the factors that create this barrier to entry. Future CR efforts should be directed to breaking down these ethnic barriers thereby allowing higher participation rates by patients that belong to these ethnic groups.
APA, Harvard, Vancouver, ISO, and other styles
34

León, Michelle, Karla N. Washington, Victoria S. McKenna, Kathryn Crowe, Kristina Fritz, and Suzanne Boyce. "Characterizing Speech Sound Productions in Bilingual Speakers of Jamaican Creole and English: Application of Durational Acoustic Methods." Journal of Speech, Language, and Hearing Research, December 29, 2022, 1–23. http://dx.doi.org/10.1044/2022_jslhr-22-00304.

Full text
Abstract:
Purpose: This study examined the speech acoustic characteristics of Jamaican Creole (JC) and English in bilingual preschoolers and adults using acoustic duration measures. The aims were to determine if, for JC and English, (a) child and adult acoustic duration characteristics differ, (b) differences occur in preschoolers' duration patterns based on the language spoken, and (c) relationships exist between the preschoolers' personal contextual factors (i.e., age, sex, and percentage of language [%language] exposure and use) and acoustic duration. Method: Data for this cross-sectional study were collected in Kingston, Jamaica, and New York City, New York, United States, during 2013–2019. Participants included typically developing simultaneous bilingual preschoolers ( n = 120, ages 3;4–5;11 [years;months]) and adults ( n = 15, ages 19;0–54;4) from the same linguistic community. Audio recordings of single-word productions of JC and English were collected through elicited picture-based tasks and used for acoustic analysis. Durational features (voice onset time [VOT], vowel duration, whole-word duration, and the proportion of vowel to whole-word duration) were measured using Praat, a speech analysis software program. Results: JC-English–speaking children demonstrated developing speech motor control through differences in durational patterns compared with adults, including VOT for voiced plosives. Children's VOT, vowel duration, and whole-word duration were produced similarly across JC and English. The contextual factor %language use was predictive of vowel and whole-word duration in English. Conclusions: The findings from this study contribute to a foundation of understanding typical bilingual speech characteristics and motor development as well as schema in JC–English speakers. In particular, minimal acoustic duration differences were observed across the post-Creole continuum, a feature that may be attributed to the JC–English bilingual environment. Supplemental Material: https://doi.org/10.23641/asha.21760469
APA, Harvard, Vancouver, ISO, and other styles
35

Crabtree-Ide, Christina, Nick Sevdalis, Patricia Bellohusen, Louis S. Constine, Fergal Fleming, David Holub, Irfan Rizvi, et al. "Strategies for Improving Access to Cancer Services in Rural Communities: A Pre-implementation Study." Frontiers in Health Services 2 (March 14, 2022). http://dx.doi.org/10.3389/frhs.2022.818519.

Full text
Abstract:
BackgroundImplementation science is defined as the scientific study of methods and strategies that facilitate the uptake of evidence-based practice into regular use by practitioners. Failure of implementation is more common in resource-limited settings and may contribute to health disparities between rural and urban communities. In this pre-implementation study, we aimed to (1) evaluate barriers and facilitators for implementation of guideline-concordant healthcare services for cancer patients in rural communities in Upstate New York and (2) identify key strategies for successful implementation of cancer services and supportive programs in resource-poor settings.MethodsThe mixed methods study was guided by the Consolidated Framework for Implementation Research (CFIR). Using engagement approaches from Community-Based Participatory Research, we collected qualitative and quantitative data to assess barriers and facilitators to implementation of rural cancer survivorship services (three focus groups, n = 43, survey n = 120). Information was collected using both in-person and web-based approaches and assessed attitude and preferences for various models of cancer care organization and delivery in rural communities. Stakeholders included cancer survivors, their families and caregivers, local public services administrators, health providers, and allied health-care professionals from rural and remote communities in Upstate New York. Data was analyzed using grounded theory.ResultsResponders reported preferences for cross-region team-based cancer care delivery and emphasized the importance of connecting local providers with cancer care networks and multidisciplinary teams at large urban cancer centers. The main reported barriers to rural cancer program implementation included regional variation in infrastructure and services delivery practices, inadequate number of providers/specialists, lack of integration among oncology, primary care and supportive services within the regions, and misalignment between clinical guideline recommendations and current reimbursement policies.ConclusionsOur findings revealed a unique combination of community, socio-economic, financial, and workforce barriers to implementation of guideline-concordant healthcare services for cancer patients in rural communities. One strategy to overcome these barriers is to improve provider cross-region collaboration and care coordination by means of teamwork and facilitation. Augmenting implementation framework with provider team-building strategies across and within regions could improve rural provider confidence and performance, minimize chances of implementation failure, and improve continuity of care for cancer patients living in rural areas.
APA, Harvard, Vancouver, ISO, and other styles
36

Mahmood, Miriam, Jennifer Kleiman, Rachel Ryan, Kayla Wong, Ronald Lu, Yufei Chen, Devika Bodas, et al. "Cooking Beliefs and Culinary Program Interest of College Students with Overweight and Obesity from Different Environments (P21-012-19)." Current Developments in Nutrition 3, Supplement_1 (June 1, 2019). http://dx.doi.org/10.1093/cdn/nzz041.p21-012-19.

Full text
Abstract:
Abstract Objectives College students with overweight/obesity previously reported a lack of confidence in meal planning/production, which may contribute to current weight status and subsequent weight gain. The objectives of this study were to: 1) determine cooking beliefs of students with overweight/obesity from different environments and 2) assess interest in a culinary-focused, weight loss program. Methods Students with overweight or obesity (BMI > 25), ages 18–24, enrolled in New York University (NYU) or LaGuardia Community College (LCC) were recruited. Participants completed a Qualtrics survey that included: 1) Cooking Attitudes Subscale, 2) Cooking Behaviors Subscale, 3) Cooking Self-Efficacy Scale (SEC), 4) Self-Efficacy for Using Basic Cooking Techniques Scale (SECT) and 5) a culinary program preference questionnaire. Height and weight were objectively measured. Descriptive, Chi square, Kruskal-Wallis, and post hoc Dunn test statistics were conducted. Results Students (N = 91; 19.6 ± 1.6 years; BMI 31.7 ± 5.6) were 64% female and 24% non-Hispanic. Institution type was associated with ethnicity (P = 0.03), with a higher percentage of non-Hispanic students from NYU. NYU students had a significantly lower BMI (P = 0.01) and were younger (P = 0.005). There was a significant difference in the Cooking Behaviors Subscale between institutions, with NYU students having overall lower scores (P = 0.0001). For LCC, there was a significant difference in BMI between the lowest and third quartiles of SECT scores (P = 0.04); students with a higher BMI had lower scores. At NYU, there was a significant difference in BMI between the lowest and second (P = 0.004) and third (P = 0.01) quartiles of the Cooking Behaviors Subscale; the lowest quartile had a higher mean BMI. Regardless of institution, the majority of students were interested in participating in a culinary-focused weight loss program for 6–8 weeks. However, NYU students reported a greater interest in weekly group meetings (P = 0.0001). Conclusions There is heterogeneity in cooking beliefs by college environment and BMI. However, interest in a culinary-focused, weight loss program is high for both 2- and 4-year tertiary institution students with overweight/obesity. Focus groups will be used for the development of population specific interventions. Funding Sources NYU College of Arts and Science Dean's Undergraduate Research Fund Grant (Spring 2018).
APA, Harvard, Vancouver, ISO, and other styles
37

Leurs, Koen, and Sandra Ponzanesi. "Mediated Crossroads: Youthful Digital Diasporas." M/C Journal 14, no. 2 (November 17, 2010). http://dx.doi.org/10.5204/mcj.324.

Full text
Abstract:
What strikes me about the habits of the people who spend so much time on the Net—well, it’s so new that we don't know what will come next—is in fact precisely how niche in character it is. You ask people what nets they are on, and they’re all so specialised! The Argentines on the Argentine Net and so forth. And it’s particularly the Argentines who are not in Argentina. (Anderson, in Gower, par. 5) The preceding quotation, taken from his 1996 interview with Eric Gower, sees Benedict Anderson reflecting on the formation of imagined, transnational communities on the Internet. Anderson is, of course, famous for his work on how nationalism, as an “imagined community,” gets constructed through the shared consumption of print media (6-7, 26-27); although its readers will never all see each other face to face, people consuming a newspaper or novel in a shared language perceive themselves as members of a collective. In this more recent interview, Anderson recognised the specific groupings of people in online communities: Argentines who find themselves outside of Argentina link up online in an imagined diaspora community. Over the course of the last decade and a half since Anderson spoke about Argentinian migrants and diaspora communities, we have witnessed an exponential growth of new forms of digital communication, including social networking sites (e.g. Facebook), Weblogs, micro-blogging (e.g. Twitter), and video-sharing sites (e.g. YouTube). Alongside these new means of communication, our current epoch of globalisation is also characterised by migration flows across, and between, all continents. In his book Modernity at Large, Arjun Appadurai recognised that “the twin forces of mass migration and electronic mediation” have altered the ways the imagination operates. Furthermore, these two pillars, human motion and digital mediation, are in constant “flux” (44). The circulation of people and digitally mediatised content proceeds across and beyond boundaries of the nation-state and provides ground for alternative community and identity formations. Appadurai’s intervention has resulted in increasing awareness of local, transnational, and global networking flows of people, ideas, and culturally hybrid artefacts. In this article, we analyse the various innovative tactics taken up by migrant youth to imagine digital diasporas. Inspired by scholars such as Appadurai, Avtar Brah and Paul Gilroy, we tease out—from a postcolonial perspective—how digital diasporas have evolved over time from a more traditional understanding as constituted either by a vertical relationship to a distant homeland or a horizontal connection to the scattered transnational community (see Safran, Cohen) to move towards a notion of “hypertextual diaspora.” With hypertextual diaspora, these central axes which constitute the understanding of diaspora are reshuffled in favour of more rhizomatic formations where affiliations, locations, and spaces are constantly destabilised and renegotiated. Needless to say, diasporas are not homogeneous and resist generalisation, but in this article we highlight common ways in which young migrant Internet users renew the practices around diaspora connections. Drawing from research on various migrant populations around the globe, we distinguish three common strategies: (1) the forging of transnational public spheres, based on maintaining virtual social relations by people scattered across the globe; (2) new forms of digital diasporic youth branding; and (3) the cultural production of innovative hypertexts in the context of more rhizomatic digital diaspora formations. Before turning to discuss these three strategies, the potential of a postcolonial framework to recognise multiple intersections of diaspora and digital mediation is elaborated. Hypertext as a Postcolonial Figuration Postcolonial scholars, Appadurai, Gilroy, and Brah among others, have been attentive to diasporic experiences, but they have paid little attention to the specificity of digitally mediated diaspora experiences. As Maria Fernández observes, postcolonial studies have been “notoriously absent from electronic media practice, theory, and criticism” (59). Our exploration of what happens when diasporic youth go online is a first step towards addressing this gap. Conceptually, this is clearly an urgent need since diasporas and the digital inform each other in the most profound and dynamic of ways: “the Internet virtually recreates all those sites which have metaphorically been eroded by living in the diaspora” (Ponzanesi, “Diasporic Narratives” 396). Writings on the Internet tend to favour either the “gold-rush” mentality, seeing the Web as a great equaliser and bringer of neoliberal progress for all, or the more pessimistic/technophobic approach, claiming that technologically determined spaces are exclusionary, white by default, masculine-oriented, and heteronormative (Everett 30, Van Doorn and Van Zoonen 261). For example, the recent study by Ito et al. shows that young people are not interested in merely performing a fiction in a parallel online world; rather, the Internet gets embedded in their everyday reality (Ito et al. 19-24). Real-life commercial incentives, power hierarchies, and hegemonies also get extended to the digital realm (Schäfer 167-74). Online interaction remains pre-structured, based on programmers’ decisions and value-laden algorithms: “people do not need a passport to travel in cyberspace but they certainly do need to play by the rules in order to function electronically” (Ponzanesi, “Diasporic Narratives” 405). We began our article with a statement by Benedict Anderson, stressing how people in the Argentinian diaspora find their space on the Internet. Online avenues increasingly allow users to traverse and add hyperlinks to their personal websites in the forms of profile pages, the publishing of preferences, and possibilities of participating in and affiliating with interest-based communities. Online journals, social networking sites, streaming audio/video pages, and online forums are all dynamic hypertexts based on Hypertext Markup Language (HTML) coding. HTML is the protocol of documents that refer to each other, constituting the backbone of the Web; every text that you find on the Internet is connected to a web of other texts through hyperlinks. These links are in essence at equal distance from each other. As well as being a technological device, hypertext is also a metaphor to think with. Figuratively speaking, hypertext can be understood as a non-hierarchical and a-centred modality. Hypertext incorporates multiplicity; different pathways are possible simultaneously, as it has “multiple entryways and exits” and it “connects any point to any other point” (Landow 58-61). Feminist theorist Donna Haraway recognised the dynamic character of hypertext: “the metaphor of hypertext insists on making connections as practice.” However, she adds, “the trope does not suggest which connections make sense for which purposes and which patches we might want to follow or avoid.” We can begin to see the value of approaching the Internet from the perspective of hypertext to make an “inquiry into which connections matter, why, and for whom” (128-30). Postcolonial scholar Jaishree K. Odin theorised how hypertextual webs might benefit subjects “living at the borders.” She describes how subaltern subjects, by weaving their own hypertextual path, can express their multivocality and negotiate cultural differences. She connects the figure of hypertext with that of the postcolonial: The hypertextual and the postcolonial are thus part of the changing topology that maps the constantly shifting, interpenetrating, and folding relations that bodies and texts experience in information culture. Both discourses are characterised by multivocality, multilinearity, openendedness, active encounter, and traversal. (599) These conceptions of cyberspace and its hypertextual foundations coalesce with understandings of “in-between”, “third”, and “diaspora media space” as set out by postcolonial theorists such as Bhabha and Brah. Bhabha elaborates on diaspora as a space where different experiences can be articulated: “These ‘in-between’ spaces provide the terrain for elaborating strategies of selfhood—singular or communal—that initiate new signs of identity, and innovative sites of collaboration, and contestation (4). (Dis-)located between the local and the global, Brah adds: “diaspora space is the point at which boundaries of inclusion and exclusion, of belonging and otherness, of ‘us’ and ‘them,’ are contested” (205). As youths who were born in the diaspora have begun to manifest themselves online, digital diasporas have evolved from transnational public spheres to differential hypertexts. First, we describe how transnational public spheres form one dimension of the mediation of diasporic experiences. Subsequently, we focus on diasporic forms of youth branding and hypertext aesthetics to show how digitally mediated practices can go beyond and transgress traditional formations of diasporas as vertically connected to a homeland and horizontally distributed in the creation of transnational public spheres. Digital Diasporas as Diasporic Public Spheres Mass migration and digital mediation have led to a situation where relationships are maintained over large geographical distances, beyond national boundaries. The Internet is used to create transnational imagined audiences formed by dispersed people, which Appadurai describes as “diasporic public spheres”. He observes that, as digital media “increasingly link producers and audiences across national boundaries, and as these audiences themselves start new conversations between those who move and those who stay, we find a growing number of diasporic public spheres” (22). Media and communication researchers have paid a lot of attention to this transnational dimension of the networking of dispersed people (see Brinkerhoff, Alonso and Oiarzabal). We focus here on three examples from three different continents. Most famously, media ethnographers Daniel Miller and Don Slater focused on the Trinidadian diaspora. They describe how “de Rumshop Lime”, a collective online chat room, is used by young people at home and abroad to “lime”, meaning to chat and hang out. Describing the users of the chat, “the webmaster [a Trini living away] proudly proclaimed them to have come from 40 different countries” (though massively dominated by North America) (88). Writing about people in the Greek diaspora, communication researcher Myria Georgiou traced how its mediation evolved from letters, word of mouth, and bulletins to satellite television, telephone, and the Internet (147). From the introduction of the Web, globally dispersed people went online to get in contact with each other. Meanwhile, feminist film scholar Anna Everett draws on the case of Naijanet, the virtual community of “Nigerians Living Abroad”. She shows how Nigerians living in the diaspora from the 1990s onwards connected in global transnational communities, forging “new black public spheres” (35). These studies point at how diasporic people have turned to the Internet to establish and maintain social relations, give and receive support, and share general concerns. Establishing transnational communicative networks allows users to imagine shared audiences of fellow diasporians. Diasporic imagination, however, goes beyond singular notions of this more traditional idea of the transnational public sphere, as it “has nowadays acquired a great figurative flexibility which mostly refers to practices of transgression and hybridisation” (Ponzanesi, “Diasporic Subjects” 208). Below we recognise another dimension of digital diasporas: the articulation of diasporic attachment for branding oneself. Mocro and Nikkei: Diasporic Attachments as a Way to Brand Oneself In this section, we consider how hybrid cultural practices are carried out over geographical distances. Across spaces on the Web, young migrants express new forms of belonging in their dealing with the oppositional motivations of continuity and change. The generational specificity of this experience can be drawn out on the basis of the distinction between “roots” and “routes” made by Paul Gilroy. In his seminal book The Black Atlantic: Modernity and Double Consciousness, Gilroy writes about black populations on both sides of the Atlantic. The double consciousness of migrant subjects is reflected by affiliating roots and routes as part of a complex cultural identification (19 and 190). As two sides of the same coin, roots refer to the stable and continuing elements of identities, while routes refer to disruption and change. Gilroy criticises those who are “more interested in the relationship of identity to roots and rootedness than in seeing identity as a process of movement and mediation which is more appropriately approached via the homonym routes” (19). He stresses the importance of not just focusing on one of either roots or routes but argues for an examination of their interplay. Forming a response to discrimination and exclusion, young migrants in online networks turn to more positive experiences such as identification with one’s heritage inspired by generational specific cultural affiliations. Here, we focus on two examples that cross two continents, showing routed online attachments to “be(com)ing Mocro”, and “be(coming) Nikkei”. Figure 1. “Leipe Mocro Flavour” music video (Ali B) The first example, being and becoming “Mocro”, refers to a local, bi-national consciousness. The term Mocro originated on the streets of the Netherlands during the late 1990s and is now commonly understood as a Dutch honorary nickname for youths with Moroccan roots living in the Netherlands and Belgium. A 2003 song, Leipe mocro flavour (“Crazy Mocro Flavour”) by Moroccan-Dutch rapper Ali B, familiarised a larger group of people with the label (see Figure 1). Ali B’s song is exemplary for a wider community of youngsters who have come to identify themselves as Mocros. One example is the Marokkanen met Brainz – Hyves (Mo), a community page within the Dutch social networking site Hyves. On this page, 2,200 youths who identify as Mocro get together to push against common stereotypes of Moroccan-Dutch boys as troublemakers and thieves and Islamic Moroccan-Dutch girls as veiled carriers of backward traditions (Leurs, forthcoming). Its description reads, “I assume that this Hyves will be the largest [Mocro community]. Because logically Moroccans have brains” (our translation): What can you find here? Discussions about politics, religion, current affairs, history, love and relationships. News about Moroccan/Arabic Parties. And whatever you want to tell others. Use your brains. Second, “Nikkei” directs our attention to Japanese migrants and their descendants. The Discover Nikkei website, set up by the Japanese American National Museum, provides a revealing description of being and becoming Nikkei: As Nikkei communities form in Japan and throughout the world, the process of community formation reveals the ongoing fluidity of Nikkei populations, the evasive nature of Nikkei identity, and the transnational dimensions of their community formations and what it means to be Nikkei. (Japanese American National Museum) This site was set up by the Japanese American National Museum for Nikkei in the global diaspora to connect and share stories. Nikkei youths of course also connect elsewhere. In her ethnographic online study, Shana Aoyama found that the social networking site Hi5 is taken up in Peru by young people of Japanese heritage as an avenue for identity exploration. She found group confirmation based on the performance of Nikkei-ness, as well as expressions of individuality. She writes, “instead of heading in one specific direction, the Internet use of Nikkei creates a starburst shape of identity construction and negotiation” (119). Mocro-ness and Nikkei-ness are common collective identification markers that are not just straightforward nationalisms. They refer back to different homelands, while simultaneously they also clearly mark one’s situation of being routed outside of this homeland. Mocro stems from postcolonial migratory flows from the Global South to the West. Nikkei-ness relates to the interesting case of the Japanese diaspora, which is little accounted for, although there are many Japanese communities present in North and South America from before the Second World War. The context of Peru is revealing, as it was the first South American country to accept Japanese migrants. It now hosts the second largest South American Japanese diaspora after Brazil (Lama), and Peru’s former president, Alberto Fujimoro, is also of Japanese origin. We can see how the importance of the nation-state gets blurred as diasporic youth, through cultural hybridisation of youth culture and ethnic ties, initiates subcultures and offers resistance to mainstream western cultural forms. Digital spaces are used to exert youthful diaspora branding. Networked branding includes expressing cultural identities that are communal and individual but also both local and global, illustrative of how “by virtue of being global the Internet can gift people back their sense of themselves as special and particular” (Miller and Slater 115). In the next section, we set out how youthful diaspora branding is part of a larger, more rhizomatic formation of multivocal hypertext aesthetics. Hypertext Aesthetics In this section, we set out how an in-between, or “liminal”, position, in postcolonial theory terms, can be a source of differential and multivocal cultural production. Appadurai, Bhabha, and Gilroy recognise that liminal positions increasingly leave their mark on the global and local flows of cultural objects, such as food, cinema, music, and fashion. Here, our focus is on how migrant youths turn to hypertextual forms of cultural production for a differential expression of digital diasporas. Hypertexts are textual fields made up of hyperlinks. Odin states that travelling through cyberspace by clicking and forging hypertext links is a form of multivocal digital diaspora aesthetics: The perpetual negotiation of difference that the border subject engages in creates a new space that demands its own aesthetic. This new aesthetic, which I term “hypertext” or “postcolonial,” represents the need to switch from the linear, univocal, closed, authoritative aesthetic involving passive encounters characterising the performance of the same to that of non-linear, multivocal, open, non-hierarchical aesthetic involving active encounters that are marked by repetition of the same with and in difference. (Cited in Landow 356-7) On their profile pages, migrant youth digitally author themselves in distinct ways by linking up to various sites. They craft their personal hypertext. These hypertexts display multivocal diaspora aesthetics which are personal and specific; they display personal intersections of affiliations that are not easily generalisable. In several Dutch-language online spaces, subjects from Dutch-Moroccan backgrounds have taken up the label Mocro as an identity marker. Across social networking sites such as Hyves and Facebook, the term gets included in nicknames and community pages. Think of nicknames such as “My own Mocro styly”, “Mocro-licious”, “Mocro-chick”. The term Mocro itself is often already multilayered, as it is often combined with age, gender, sexual preference, religion, sport, music, and generationally specific cultural affiliations. Furthermore, youths connect to a variety of groups ranging from feminist interests (“Women in Charge”), Dutch nationalism (“I Love Holland”), ethnic affiliations (“The Moroccan Kitchen”) to clothing (the brand H&M), and global junk food (McDonalds). These diverse affiliations—that are advertised online simultaneously—add nuance to the typical, one-dimensional stereotype about migrant youth, integration, and Islam in the context of Europe and Netherlands (Leurs, forthcoming). On the online social networking site Hi5, Nikkei youths in Peru, just like any other teenagers, express their individuality by decorating their personal profile page with texts, audio, photos, and videos. Besides personal information such as age, gender, and school information, Aoyama found that “a starburst” of diverse affiliations is published, including those that signal Japanese-ness such as the Hello Kitty brand, anime videos, Kanji writing, kimonos, and celebrities. Also Nikkei hyperlink to elements that can be identified as “Latino” and “Chino” (Chinese) (104-10). Furthermore, users can show their multiple affiliations by joining different “groups” (after which a hyperlink to the group community appears on the profile page). Aoyama writes “these groups stretch across a large and varied scope of topics, including that of national, racial/ethnic, and cultural identities” (2). These examples illustrate how digital diasporas encompass personalised multivocal hypertexts. With the widely accepted adagio “you are what you link” (Adamic and Adar), hypertextual webs can be understood as productions that reveal how diasporic youths choose to express themselves as individuals through complex sets of non-homogeneous identifications. Migrant youth connects to ethnic origin and global networks in eclectic and creative ways. The concept of “digital diaspora” therefore encapsulates both material and virtual (dis)connections that are identifiable through common traits, strategies, and aesthetics. Yet these hypertextual connections are also highly personalised and unique, offering a testimony to the fluid negotiations and intersections between the local and the global, the rooted and the diasporic. Conclusions In this article, we have argued that migrant youths render digital diasporas more complex by including branding and hypertextual aesthetics in transnational public spheres. Digital diasporas may no longer be understood simply in terms of their vertical relations to a homeland or place of origin or as horizontally connected to a clearly marked transnational community; rather, they must also be seen as engaging in rhizomatic digital practices, which reshuffle traditional understandings of origin and belonging. Contemporary youthful digital diasporas are therefore far more complex in their engagement with digital media than most existing theory allows: connections are hybridised, and affiliations are turned into practices of diasporic branding and becoming. There is a generational specificity to multivocal diaspora aesthetics; this specificity lies in the ways migrant youths show communal recognition and express their individuality through hypertext which combines affiliation to their national/ethnic “roots” with an embrace of other youth subcultures, many of them transnational. These two axes are constantly reshuffled and renegotiated online where, thanks to the technological possibilities of HTML hypertext, a whole range of identities and identifications may be brought together at any given time. We trust that these insights will be of interest in future discussion of online networks, transnational communities, identity formation, and hypertext aesthetics where much urgent and topical work remains to be done. References Adamic, Lada A., and Eytan Adar. “You Are What You Link.” 2001 Tenth International World Wide Web Conference, Hong Kong. 26 Apr. 2010. ‹http://www10.org/program/society/yawyl/YouAreWhatYouLink.htm›. Ali B. “Leipe Mocro Flavour.” ALIB.NL / SPEC Entertainment. 2007. 4 Oct. 2010 ‹http://www3.alib.nl/popupAlibtv.php?catId=42&contentId=544›. Alonso, Andoni, and Pedro J. Oiarzabal. Diasporas in the New Media Age. Reno: U of Nevada P, 2010. Anderson, Benedict. Imagined Communities: Reflections on the Origin and Spread of Nationalism. Rev. ed. London: Verso, 2006 (1983). Aoyama, Shana. Nikkei-Ness: A Cyber-Ethnographic Exploration of Identity among the Japanese Peruvians of Peru. Unpublished MA thesis. South Hadley: Mount Holyoke, 2007. 1 Feb. 2010 ‹http://hdl.handle.net/10166/736›. Appadurai, Arjun. Modernity at Large: Cultural Dimensions of Globalization. Minneapolis: U of Minnesota P, 1996. Bhabha, Homi. The Location of Culture. New York: Routledge, 1994. Brah, Avtar. Cartographies of Diaspora: Contesting Identities. London: Routledge, 1996. Brinkerhoff, Jennifer M. Digital Diasporas: Identity and Transnational Engagement. Cambridge: Cambridge UP, 2009. Cohen, Robin. Global Diasporas: An Introduction. London: U College London P, 1997. Everett, Anna. Digital Diaspora: A Race for Cyberspace. Albany: SUNY, 2009. Fernández, María. “Postcolonial Media Theory.” Art Journal 58.3 (1999): 58-73. Georgiou, Myria. Diaspora, Identity and the Media: Diasporic Transnationalism and Mediated Spatialities. Creskill: Hampton Press, 2006. Gilroy, Paul. The Black Atlantic: Modernity and Double Consciousness. London: Verso, 1993. Gower, Eric. “When the Virtual Becomes the Real: A Talk with Benedict Anderson.” NIRA Review, 1996. 19 Apr. 2010 ‹http://www.nira.or.jp/past/publ/review/96spring/intervi.html›. Haraway, Donna. Modest Witness@Second Millennium. FemaleMan Meets OncoMouse: Feminism and Technoscience. New York: Routledge, 1997. Ito, Mizuko, et al. Hanging Out, Messing Out, and Geeking Out: Kids Living and Learning with New Media. Cambridge: MIT Press, 2010. Japanese American National Museum. “Discover Nikkei: Japanese Migrants and Their Descendants.” Discover Nikkei, 2005. 4 Oct. 2010. ‹http://www.discovernikkei.org/en/›. Lama, Abraham. “Home Is Where the Heartbreak Is for Japanese-Peruvians.” Asia Times 16 Oct. 1999. 6 May 2010 ‹http://www.atimes.com/japan-econ/AJ16Dh01.html›. Landow, George P. Hypertext 3.0. Critical Theory and New Media in an Era of Globalization. Baltimore: Johns Hopkins UP, 2006. Leurs, Koen. Identity, Migration and Digital Media. Utrecht: Utrecht University. PhD Thesis, forthcoming. Miller, Daniel, and Don Slater. The Internet: An Etnographic Approach. Oxford: Berg, 2000. Mo. “Marokkanen met Brainz.” Hyves, 23 Feb. 2008. 4 Oct. 2010. ‹http://marokkaansehersens.hyves.nl/›. Odin, Jaishree K. “The Edge of Difference: Negotiations between the Hypertextual and the Postcolonial.” Modern Fiction Studies 43.3 (1997): 598-630. Ponzanesi, Sandra. “Diasporic Narratives @ Home Pages: The Future as Virtually Located.” Colonies – Missions – Cultures in the English-Speaking World. Ed. Gerhard Stilz. Tübingen: Stauffenburg, 2001. 396–406. Ponzanesi, Sandra. “Diasporic Subjects and Migration.” Thinking Differently: A Reader in European Women's Studies. Ed. Gabrielle Griffin and Rosi Braidotti. London: Zed Books, 2002. 205–20. Safran, William. “Diasporas in Modern Societies: Myths of Homeland and Return.” Diaspora 1.1 (1991): 83-99. Schäfer, Mirko T. Bastard Culture! How User Participation Transforms Cultural Production. Amsterdam: Amsterdam UP, 2011. Van Doorn, Niels, and Liesbeth van Zoonen. “Theorizing Gender and the Internet: Past, Present, and Future.” Routledge Handbook of Internet Politics. Ed. Andrew Chadwick and Philip N. Howard. London: Routledge. 261-74.
APA, Harvard, Vancouver, ISO, and other styles
38

Spruill, Tanya M., Daniel Friedman, Laura Diaz, Mark J. Butler, Keith S. Goldfeld, Susanna O’Kula, Jacqueline Montesdeoca, et al. "Telephone-based depression self-management in Hispanic adults with epilepsy: a pilot randomized controlled trial." Translational Behavioral Medicine, May 8, 2021. http://dx.doi.org/10.1093/tbm/ibab045.

Full text
Abstract:
Abstract Depression is associated with adverse outcomes in epilepsy but is undertreated in this population. Project UPLIFT, a telephone-based depression self-management program, was developed for adults with epilepsy and has been shown to reduce depressive symptoms in English-speaking patients. There remains an unmet need for accessible mental health programs for Hispanic adults with epilepsy. The purpose of this study was to evaluate the feasibility, acceptability, and effects on depressive symptoms of a culturally adapted version of UPLIFT for the Hispanic community. Hispanic patients with elevated depressive symptoms (n = 72) were enrolled from epilepsy clinics in New York City and randomized to UPLIFT or usual care. UPLIFT was delivered in English or Spanish to small groups in eight weekly telephone sessions. Feasibility was assessed by recruitment, retention, and adherence rates and acceptability was assessed by self-reported satisfaction with the intervention. Depressive symptoms (PHQ-9 scores) were compared between study arms over 12 months. The mean age was 43.3±11.3, 71% of participants were female and 67% were primary Spanish speakers. Recruitment (76% consent rate) and retention rates (86–93%) were high. UPLIFT participants completed a median of six out of eight sessions and satisfaction ratings were high, but rates of long-term practice were low. Rates of clinically significant depressive symptoms (PHQ-9 ≥5) were lower in UPLIFT versus usual care throughout follow-up (63% vs. 72%, 8 weeks; 40% vs. 70%, 6 months; 47% vs. 70%, 12 months). Multivariable-adjusted regressions demonstrated statistically significant differences at 6 months (OR = 0.24, 95% CI, 0.06–0.93), which were slightly reduced at 12 months (OR = 0.30, 95% CI, 0.08–1.16). Results suggest that UPLIFT is feasible and acceptable among Hispanic adults with epilepsy and demonstrate promising effects on depressive symptoms. Larger trials in geographically diverse samples are warranted.
APA, Harvard, Vancouver, ISO, and other styles
39

Sadarangani, Tina, Lydia Missaelides, Abraham Brody, and Chau Trinh-Shevrin. "Racial Disparities in Nutritional Risk and Its Association with Chronic Disease and Health Outcomes Among Community-Dwelling Older Adults in the Adult Day Health Setting (P04-121-19)." Current Developments in Nutrition 3, Supplement_1 (June 1, 2019). http://dx.doi.org/10.1093/cdn/nzz051.p04-121-19.

Full text
Abstract:
Abstract Objectives Adult day health centers (ADHCs) serve >260,000 chronically ill individuals annually and are a preferred long-term care source for racial minorities, who also experience diet related disparities. Evidence regarding prevalence of nutritional risk is needed to inform dietary intervention planning in ADHCs. This study (1) identified prevalence of nutritional risk and associated factors, in a diverse sample of older ADHC users, (2) stratified differences in nutritional risk by race, and (3) explored associations between nutritional risk, chronic illness, and healthcare utilization. Methods This was a secondary cross-sectional analysis of data originally collected by registered nurses between 2013–2017 at 12 California-based ADHCs. Nutritional risk was assessed using the DETERMINE checklist. Results were stratified by race to examine statistically significant (P < .05) differences among White Non-Hispanics, Blacks, Hispanics, and Asians aged >50. Bivariate chi-square tests were used to explore associations between nutritional risk and chronic disease, as well as healthcare utilization. Results The majority of the sample (N = 188) was at moderate (45.2%) or high (38.5%) nutritional risk, with statistically significant racial differences (P = .01). Blacks (65%) were at high nutritional risk compared to whites (39.5%), Hispanics (33.3%), and Asians (29.30%). Associations between nutritional risk and hypertension (P = .01), hyperlipidemia (P = .04), diabetes (P = .03), dementia (P = .00), depression (P = .01), and stroke (P = .04) and emergency department use (P = .01) were significant. Among blacks, 76.5% ate < 5 servings of fruits, vegetables, or milk daily, compared to 39.5% of whites; 21% of blacks ate <2 meals a day, compared to 2% of whites and Hispanics. Blacks (48.5%) more often reported involuntary weight loss/gain compared to whites (23.3%), and had the highest prevalence of tooth loss/mouth pain (41.2%) of any racial group. Conclusions Older adults in ADHCs are at elevated risk of malnutrition, and blacks disproportionately so. Routine nutritional screening in ADHCs should be considered, but customized population specific approaches are needed to address unique drivers of malnutrition risk. Funding Sources New York University Center for the Study of Asian American Health Pilot Project Program for Alzheimer's Disease & Thomas J. Long Foundation. Supporting Tables, Images and/or Graphs
APA, Harvard, Vancouver, ISO, and other styles
40

Ballantyne, Glenda, and Aneta Podkalicka. "Dreaming Diversity: Second Generation Australians and the Reimagining of Multicultural Australia." M/C Journal 23, no. 1 (March 18, 2020). http://dx.doi.org/10.5204/mcj.1648.

Full text
Abstract:
Introduction For migrants, the dream of a better life is often expressed by the metaphor of the journey (Papastergiadis 31). Propelled by a variety of forces and choices, migrant life narratives tend to revolve around movement from one place to another, from a homeland associated with cultural and spiritual origins to a hostland which offers new opportunities and possibilities. In many cases, however, their dreams of migrants are deferred; migrants endure hardships and make sacrifices in the hope of a better life for their children. Many studies have explored the social and economic outcomes of the “second” generation – the children of migrants born and raised in the new country. In Australia studies have found, despite some notable exceptions (Betts and Healy; Inglis), that the children of migrants have achieved the economic and social integration their parents dreamed of (Khoo, McDonald, Giorgas, and Birrell). At the same time, however, research has found that the second generation face new challenges, including the negative impact of ethnic and racial discrimination (Dunn, Blair, Bliuc, and Kamp; Jakubowicz, Collins, Reid, and Chafic), the experience of split identities and loyalties (Butcher and Thomas) and a complicated sense of “home” and belonging (Fabiansson; Mason; Collins and Read). In this articles, we explore what the dream of a better life means for second generation migrants, and how that dream might reshape Australia’s multicultural identity. A focus on this generation’s imaginings, visions and hopes for the future is important, we argue, because its distinctive experience, differing from that of other sections of the Australian community in some important ways, needs to be recognised as the nation’s multicultural identity is refashioned in changing circumstances. Unlike their parents, the second generation was born into what is now one of the most diverse countries in the world, with over a quarter (26%) of the population born overseas and a further 23% having at least one parent born overseas (Australian Bureau of Statistics). Unlike their parents, they have come of age in the era of digitally-enabled international communication that has transformed the ways in which people connect. This cohort has a distinctive relationship to the national imaginary. The idea of “multicultural Australia” that was part of the country’s adoption of a multicultural policy framework in the early 1970s was based on a narrative of “old” (white Anglo) Australians “welcoming” (or “tolerating”) “new” (immigrant) Australians (Ang and Stratton; Hage). In this narrative, the second generation, who are Australian born but not “old” Australians and of “migrant background” but not “new” Australians, are largely invisible, setting them apart from both their migrant parents and other, overseas born young Australians of diverse backgrounds, with whom they are often grouped (Collins, Reid, and Fabiansson; Ang, Brand, Noble, and Sternberg; Collins, Reid, and Fabiansson; Harris).In what follows, we aim to contribute to calls for a rethinking of Australian national identity and “culture of interaction” to better reflect the experiences of all citizens (Levey; Collins, Reid, and Fabiansson) by focusing on the experiences of the second generation. Taking our cue from Geoffrey Levey, we argue that “it is not the business of government or politicians to complete the definition of what it means to be Australian” and that we should instead look to a sense of national identity that emerges organically from “mundane daily social interaction” (Levey). To this end, we adopt an “everyday multiculturalism” perspective (Wise and Velayutham), “view[ing] situations of co-existence ... as a concrete, specific context of action, in which difference comes across as a constraint ... and as a resource” (Semi, Colombo, Comozzi, and Frisina 67). We see our focus on the second generation as complementary to existing studies that have examined experiences of young Australians of diverse backgrounds through an everyday multiculturalism prism without distinguishing between newly arrived young people and those born in Australia (Ang, Brand, Noble, and Sternberg; Collins, Reid, and Fabiansson; Harris). We emphasise, however, after Mansouri and Johns, that the second generation’s distinctive cultural and socio-structural challenges and needs – including their distinctive relationship to the idea of “multicultural Australia” – deserve special attention. Like Christina Schachtner, we are cognisant that “faced with the task of giving meaning and direction to their lives, the next generation is increasingly confronted with a need to reconsider the revered values of the present and the past and to reorientate themselves while establishing new meanings” (233; emphasis ours). Like her, we recognise that in the contemporary era, young adults often use digital communicative spaces for the purpose of giving meaning to their lives in the circumstances in which they find themselves (Schachtner 233). Above all, we concur with Hopkins and Dolic when they state that “understanding the processes that inform the creation and maintenance of ... ethnic minority and Australian mainstream identities amongst second-generation young people is critical if these young people are to feel included and recognised, whilst avoiding the alienation and social exclusion that has had such ugly results in other parts of the world (153).In part one, we draw on initial findings from a collaborative empirical study between Swinburne University and the Victorian Multicultural Commission to outline some of the paradoxes and contradictions encountered by a particular – well-educated (currently or recently enrolled at university) and creative (seeking jobs in the media and cultural industries) – segment of the second generation in their attempts to imagine themselves within the frame of “multicultural Australia” (3 focus groups, of 60-90 minutes duration, involving 7-10 participants were conducted over 2018 and 2019). These include feeling more Australian than their parents while not always being seen as “really” Australian by the broader community; embracing diversity but struggling to find a language in which to adequately express it; and acknowledging the progress being made in representing diversity in the mainstream media while not seeing their stories and those of their parents represented there.In part two, we outline future research directions that look to a range of cultural texts and mediated forms of social interactions across popular culture and media in search of new conversations about personal and national identity that could feed into a renewal of a more inclusive understanding of Australian identity.Living and Talking DiversityOur conversations with second generation young Australians confirmed many of the paradoxes and contradictions experienced by young people of diverse backgrounds in the constant traversing of their parents’ and Australian culture captured in previous research (Ang, Brand, Noble, and Sternberg; Harris). Emblematic of these paradoxes are the complicated ways they relate to “Australian identity,” notably expressed in the tension felt between identifying as “Australian” when overseas and with their parent’s heritage when in Australia. An omnipresent reminder of their provisional status as “Aussies” is questions such as “well I know you’re Australian but what are you really?” As one participant put it: “I identify as Australian, I’m proud of my Australian identity. But in Australia I’m Turkish and that’s just because when someone asks I’m not gonna say ‘oh I’m Australian’ ... I used to live in the UK and if someone asked me there, I was Australian. If someone asks me here, I’m Turkish. So that’s how it is. Turkish, born in Australia”The second generation young people in our study responded to these ambiguities in different ways. Some applied hyphenated labels to themselves, while others felt that identification with the nation was largely irrelevant, documented in existing research (Collins, Reid, and Fabiansson; Harris). As one of our participants put it, “I just personally don’t find national identity to be that important or relevant – it’s just another detail about me – I [don’t] think it should affect anything else.” The study also found that our participants had difficulty in finding specific terms to express their identities. For some, trying to describe their identities was “really confusing,” and their thinking changed from day to day. For others, the reason it was hard to express their identities was that the very substance of mundane, daily life “feels very default”. This was the case when many of our participants reported their lived experiences of diversity, whether related to culinary and sport experiences, or simply social interactions with “the people I talk to” and daily train trips where “everyone [of different ethnicities] just rides the train together and doesn’t think twice about it”. As one young person put it, “the default is going around the corner for dinner and having Mongolian beef and pho”. We found that a factor feeding into the ambivalence of articulating Australian identity is the influence – constraining and enabling – of prevailing idioms of identity and difference. Several instances were uncovered in which widely circulating and highly politicised discourses of identity had the effect of shutting down conversation. In particular, the issue of what was “politically correct” language was a touchstone for much of the discussion among the young people in our study. This concern with “appropriate language” created some hesitancy and confusion, as when one person was trying to describe white Australians: “obviously you know Australia’s still a – how do you, you know, I guess I don’t know how to – the appropriate, you know PC language but Australia’s a white country if that makes sense you know”. Other participants were reluctant to talk about cultural groups and their shared characteristics at all, seeing such statements as potentially racist. In contrast to this feeling of restricted discourse, we found many examples of our participants playing and repurposing received vocabularies. As reported in other research, the young people used ideas about origin, race and ethnicity in loose and shifting ways (Back; Butcher). In some cases, in contrast to fears of “racist” connotations of identifying individuals by their cultural background, the language of labels and shorthand descriptors was used as a lingua franca for playful, albeit not unproblematic, negotiations across cultural boundaries. One participant reported being called one of “The Turks” in classes at university. His response expressed the tensions embedded in this usage, finding it stereotyping but ultimately affectionate. As he expressed it, “it’s like, ‘I have a personality, guys.’ But that was okay, it was endearing, they were all with it”. Another finding highlighted more fraught issues that can be raised when existing identity categories are transposed from contexts strongly marked by historically specific circumstances into unrelated contexts. This was the case of a university classmate saying of another Turkish participant that he “was the black guy of the class because … [he] was the darkest”. The circulation of “borrowed” discourses – particularly, as in this case, from the USA – is notable in the digital era, and the broader implications of such usage among people who are not always aware of the connotations of a discourse that is deeply rooted in a particular history and culture, are yet to be fully examined (Lester). The study also shed some light on the struggles the young people in our study encountered in finding a language in which to describe their identities and relationship to “Australianness”. When asked if they thought others would consider them to be “Australian”, responses revealed a spectrum ranging from perceived rejection to an ill-defined and provisional inclusion. One person reported – despite having been born and lived in Australia all their life – that “I don’t think I would ever be called Australian from Australian people – from white Australian people”. Another thought that it was not possible to generalise about being considered Australians by the broader community, as “some do, some don’t”. Again, responses varied. While for some it was a source of unease, for others the distancing from “Australianness” was not experienced negatively, as in the case of the participant who said of being singled out as “different” from the Anglo-Celtic mainstream, “I actually don’t mind that … I’ve got something that a lot of white Australians males don’t have”.A connected finding was the continuing presence of, often subtle but clearly registered, racism. The second generation young people in the study were very conscious of the ways in which experiences of racism they encountered differed from – and represented an improvement on – that of their parents. Drawing an intergenerational contrast between the explicit racism their parents were often subjected to and their own experiences of what they frequently referred to as microaggressions, they mostly saw progress occurring on this front. Another sign of progress they observed was in relation to their own propensity to reject exclusionary thinking, as when they suggested that their parents’ generation are more likely to make “assumptions about culture” based on people’s “outward appearance” which they found problematic because “everyone’s everywhere”. While those cultural faux pas were judged as “well-meaning” and even justified by not “growing up in a culturally diverse setting”, they are at odds with young people’s own experiences and understanding of diversity.The final major finding to emerge from the study was the widespread view that mainstream media fails to represent their lives. Again, our participants acknowledged the progress that has been made over recent decades and applauded moves towards greater representation of non-Anglo-Celtic communities in mainstream free-to-air programming. But the vast majority reported that their experiences are not represented. The sentiment that “I’d love to see someone who looks like me on TV more – on a really basic level – I’d like to see someone who looks like my Dad” was shared by many. What remained missing – and motivated many of the young people in our study to embark on filmmaking careers – was content that reflected their local, place-based lifestyles and the intergenerational dynamics of migrated families that is the fabric of their lives. When asked if Australian media content reflected their experience, one participant put it bluntly: “if I felt like it did, I wouldn’t be actively trying to make documentaries and films about it”.Dreaming DiversityThe findings of the study confirmed earlier research highlighting the ambiguities encountered by second generation Australians who are demographically, emotionally and culturally marked by their parents’ experiences of migration even as they forge their post-migration futures. On the one hand, they reported an allegiance to the Australian nation and recognised that in many ways that they are more part of its fabric than their parents. On the other hand, they reported a number of situations in which they feel marginalised and not “really” Australian, as when they are asked “where are you really from” and when they do not see their stories represented in the mainstream media. In particular, the study highlighted the tensions involved in describing personal and Australian identity, revealing the struggle the second generation often experience in their attempts to express the complexity of their identifications and sense of belonging. As we see it, the lack of recognition of being “really” Australian felt by the young people in our study and their view that mainstream media does not sufficiently represent their experience are connected. Underlying both is a status quo in which the normative Australian is Anglo-Celtic. To help shift this prevailing view of the normative Australian, we endorse earlier calls for a research program centred on analyses of a range of cultural texts and mediated forms of social interactions in search of new conversations about Australian identity. Media, both public and commercial, have the potential to be key agents for community building and identity formation. From radio and television programs through to online discussion forums and social media, media have provided platforms for creating collective imagination and a sense of belonging, including in the context of migration in Australia (Sinclair and Cunningham; Johns; Ang, Brand, Noble, and Sternberg). By supplying symbolic resources through which cultural differences and identities are represented and circulated, they can offer up opportunities for societal reflection, scrutiny and self-interpretation. As a starting point, for example, three current popular media formats that depict or are produced by second-generation Australians lend themselves to such a multi-sited analysis. The first is internet forums in which second generation young people share their quotidian experiences of “bouncing between both cultures in our lives” (Wu and Yuan), often in humorous forms. As the popularity of Subtle Asian Traits and its offshoot Subtle Curry Traits have indicated, these sites tap into the hunger among the Asian diaspora for increased media visibility. The second is the work of comedians, including those who self-identify as of migrant descent. The politics of stereotyping and racial jokes and the difference between them has been a subject of considerable research, including into television comedy productions which are important because of their potential audience reach and ensuing post-viewing conversations (Zambon). The third is a new generation of television programs which are set in situations of diversity without being heralded as “about” diversity. A key case is the television drama series The Heights, first screened on the Australian Broadcasting Corporation in Australia in 2019, which explores the relationships between the residents of a social housing tower and the people who live in the rapidly gentrifying community that surrounds it in the melting pot of urban Australia. These examples represent a diverse range of cultural expressions – created informally and spontaneously (Subtle Asian Traits, Subtle Curry Traits), fashioned by individuals working in the entertainment industry (comedians), and produced professionally and broadcast on national TV networks (The Heights). What unites them is an engagement with the novel forms of belonging that postwar migration has produced (Papastergiadis 20) and an attempt to communicate and represent the lived experience of contemporary Australian diversity, including negotiated dreams and aspirations for the future. We propose a systematic analysis of the new languages of identity and difference that their efforts to represent the evolving patterns and circumstances of diversity in Australia are bringing forth. Conclusions To dream in the context of migration implies, more often than not, the prospect of a better material life in an adopted country. Instead, through the notion of “dreaming diversity”, we foreground the dreams, expectations and imaginations for the future of the Australian second generation which centre on carving out their cultural place in the nation.The empirical research we presented paints a picture of the second generation's paradoxical and contradictory experiences as they navigate the shifting landscape of Australia’s multicultural society. It gives a glimpse of the challenges and hopes they encounter as well as the direction of their attempts to negotiate their place within “Australian identity”. Finally, it highlights the need for a more expansive conversation and language in which that identity can be expressed. A language in which to talk – not just about the many cultures that make up the nation, but also to each other from within them – will be crucial to facilitate the deeper intercultural understanding and engagement many young people aspire to. Our ambition is not to codify a register of approved terms, and even less to formulate a new official discourse for use in multicultural policy documents. It is rather to register, crystalise and expand a discussion around difference and identity that is emerging from everyday interactions of Australians and foster a more committed conversation attuned to contemporary realities and communicative spaces where those interactions take place. In search of a richer vocabulary in which Australian identity might be reimagined, we have identified a research program that will explore emerging ways of talking about difference and identity across a range of cultural and media formats about or by the second generation. While arguing for the significance of the languages and idioms that are emerging in the spaces that young people inhabit, we recognise that, no less than other demographics, second-generation Australians are influenced by circulating narratives and categories in which (national) identity is discussed (Harris 15), including official conceptions and prevailing discourses of identity politics which are often encountered online and through popular culture. Our point is that the dreams, visions and imaginaries of second generation Australians, who will be among the key actors in fashioning Australia’s multicultural futures, are an important element of reimagining Australia’s multiculturalism even if those discourses may be partial, ambivalent or fragmented. We see this research program as building on and extending the tradition of sociological and cultural analyses of popular culture, media and cultural diversity and contributing to a more robust and systematic catalogue of multicultural narratives across different popular formats, genres, and production arrangements characteristic of the diversified media landscape. We have focused on the Australian “new second generation” (Zhou and Bankston), coming of age in the early 21st century, as a significant but under-researched group in the belief that their narratives of aspirations and dreams will be a crucial component of discursive innovations and practical programs for social change.ReferencesAustralian Bureau of Statistics. “The Way We Live Now.” 2017. 1 Mar. 2020 <https://www.abs.gov.au/ausstats/abs@.nsf/mf/2024.0>.Ang, Ien, Jeffrey E. Brand, Greg Noble, and Jason Sternberg. Connecting Diversity: Paradoxes of Multicultural Australia. Artarmon: Special Broadcasting Service Corporation, 2006.Back, L., P. Cohen, and M. Keith. “Between Home and Belonging: Critical Ethnographies of Race, Place and Identity.” Finding the Way Home: Young People’s Stories of Gender, Ethnicity, Class and Places in Hamburg and London. Ed. N. Räthzel. Göttingen: V&R Unipress, 2008. 197–224.Betts, Katherine, and Ernest Healy. “Lebanese Muslims in Australia and Social Disadvantage.” People and Place 14.1 (2006): 24-42.Butcher, Melissa. “FOB Boys, VCs and Habibs: Using Language to Navigate Difference and Belonging in Culturally Diverse Sydney.” Journal of Ethnic and Migration Studies 34.3 (2008): 371-387. DOI: 10.1080/13691830701880202. Butcher, Melissa, and Mandy Thomas. “Ingenious: Emerging Hybrid Youth Cultures in Western Sydney.” Global Youth? Hybrid Identities, Plural Worlds. Eds. Pam Nilan and Carles Feixa. London: Routledge, 2006.Collins, Jock, and Carol Reid. “Minority Youth, Crime, Conflict, and Belonging in Australia.” International Migration & Integration 10 (2009): 377–391. DOI: 10.1007/s12134-009-0112-1.Collins, Jock, Carol Reid, and Charlotte Fabiansson. “Identities, Aspirations and Belonging of Cosmopolitan Youth in Australia.” Cosmopolitan Civil Societies Journal 3.3 (2011): 92-107.Dunn, K.M., K. Blair, A-M. Bliuc, and A. Kamp. “Land and Housing as Crucibles of Racist Nationalism: Asian Australians’ Experiences.” Geographical Research 56.4 (2018): 465-478. DOI: 10.1111/1745-5871.12313.Fabiansson, Charlotte. “Belonging and Social Identity among Young People in Western Sydney, Australia.” International Migration & Integration 19 (2018): 351–366. DOI: 10.1007/s12134-018-0540-x.Hage, Ghassan. White Nation: Fantasies of White Supremacy in a Multicultural Society. Sydney: Pluto Press, 1998.Heights, The. Matchbox Pictures and For Pete’s Sake Productions, 2019.Harris, Anita. Young People and Everyday Multiculturalism. New York: Routledge, 2013.Hopkins, Liza, and Z. Dolic. “Second Generation Youth and the New Media Environment.” Youth Identity and Migration: Culture, Values and Social Connectedness. Ed. Fethi Mansouri. Altona: Common Ground, 2009. 153-164.Inglis, Christine. Inequality, Discrimination and Social Cohesion: Socio-Economic Mobility and Incorporation of Australian-Born Lebanese and Turkish Background Youth. Sydney: U of Sydney, 2010. Jakubowicz, Andrew, Jock Collins, Carol Reid, and Wafa Chafic. “Minority Youth and Social Transformation in Australia: Identities, Belonging and Cultural Capital.” Social Inclusion 2.2 (2014): 5-16.Johns, Amelia. “Muslim Young People Online: ‘Acts of Citizenship’ in Socially Networked Spaces.” Social Inclusion 2.2 (2014):71-82.Khoo, Siew-Ean, Peter McDonald, Dimi Giorgas, and Bob Birrell. Second Generation Australians. Canberra: Department of Immigration and Multicultural and Indigenous Affairs, Australian Centre for Population Research and Research School of Social Sciences, and the Australian National University and Centre for Population and Urban Research, 2002.Levey, Geoffrey. “National Identity and Diversity: Back to First Principles.” Who We Are. Eds. Julianne Schultz and Peter Mares. Griffith Review 61 (2018).Mason, V. “Children of the ‘Idea of Palestine’: Negotiating Identity, Belonging and Home in the Palestinian Diaspora.” Journal of Intercultural Studies 28.3 (2007): 271-285.Papastergiadis, Nikos. The Turbulence of Migration: Globalization, Deterritorialization and Hybridity. Cambridge: Polity, 2000.Schachtner, Christina. “Transculturality in the Internet: Culture Flows and Virtual Publics.” Current Sociology 63.2 (2015): 228–243. DOI: 10.1177/0011392114556585.Semi, G., E. Colombo, I. Comozzi, and A. Frisina. “Practices of Difference: Analyzing Multiculturalism in Everyday Life.” Everyday Multiculturalism. Eds. Amanda Wise and Selvaraj Velayutham. UK: Palgrave Macmillan, 2009. Sinclair, Iain, and Stuart Cunningham, eds. Floating Lives: The Media and Asian Diasporas. Lanham: Rowman & Littlefield, 2001.Wise, Amanda, and Selvaraj Velayutham, eds. Everyday Multiculturalism. UK: Palgrave Macmillan, 2009. DOI: 10.1057/9780230244474.Wu, Nicholas, and Karen Yuan. “The Meme-ification of Asianness.” The Atlantic Dec. 2018. <https://www.theatlantic.com/technology/archive/2018/12/the-asian-identity-according-to-subtle-asian-traits/579037/>.Zambon, Kate. “Negotiating New German Identities: Transcultural Comedy and the Construction of Pluralistic Unity.” Media, Culture and Society 39.4 (2017): 552–567. Zhou, Min, and Carl L. Bankston. The Rise of the New Second Generation. Cambridge: Polity, 2016. DOI: 10.1177/0163443716663640.AcknowledgmentsThe empirical data reported here was drawn from Zooming In: Multiculturalism through the Lens of the Next Generation, a research collaboration between Swinburne University and the Victorian Multicultural Commission exploring contemporary perspectives on diversity among young Australians through their filmmaking practice, led by Chief Investigators Dr Glenda Ballantyne (Department of Social Sciences) and Dr Vincent Giarusso (Department of Film and Animation). We wish to thank Liam Wright and Alexa Scarlata for their work as Research Assistants on this project, and particularly the participants who shared their stories. Special thanks also to the editors of this special issue and the anonymous reviewers for their insightful feedback on an earlier version of this article. FundingZooming In: Multiculturalism through the Lens of the Next Generation has been generously supported by the Victorian Multicultural Commission, which we gratefully acknowledge.
APA, Harvard, Vancouver, ISO, and other styles
41

"Lopez PM, Islam N, Feinberg A, Myers C, Seidl L, Drackett E, Riley L, Mata A, Pinzon J, Benjamin E, Wyka K, Dannefer R, Lopez J, Trinh-Shevrin C, Maybank KA, Thorpe LE. A Place-Based Community Health Worker Program: Feasibility and Early Outcomes, New York City, 2015. Am J Prev Med 2017;52(3S3):S284-S289." American Journal of Preventive Medicine 52, no. 5 (May 2017): 690. http://dx.doi.org/10.1016/j.amepre.2017.02.017.

Full text
APA, Harvard, Vancouver, ISO, and other styles
42

Wain, Veronica. "Able to Live, Laugh and Love." M/C Journal 11, no. 3 (July 2, 2008). http://dx.doi.org/10.5204/mcj.54.

Full text
Abstract:
The autobiographical documentary film “18q – a valuable life”, is one attempt to redefine the place of disability in contemporary western society. My work presents some key moments in my life and that of my family since the birth of my youngest child, Allycia in 1995. Allycia was born with a rare genetic condition affecting the 18th chromosome resulting in her experiencing the world somewhat differently to the rest of the family. The condition, which manifests in a myriad of ways with varying levels of severity, affects individuals’ physical and intellectual development (Chromosome 18, n. pag.). While the film outlines the condition and Allycia’s medical history, the work is primarily concerned with the experiences of the family and offering an alternate story of disability as “other”. Drawing on Rosemarie Garland Thomson’s notion of shape structuring story ("Shape") and Margrit Shildrick’s discussion of becoming vulnerable as theoretical foundations, I reflect on how the making of the film has challenged my previously held views about disability and ultimately about myself. The Film & Disability “18q – a valuable life” introduces a new, previously “invisible” shape in the form of bodies coded as Chromosome 18 to the screen. The initial impulse to make the film was driven by a need to provide a media presence for a rare genetic condition known collectively as Chromosome 18 (Chromosome 18, n. pag.) where previously there was none. This impulse was fuelled by a desire to tell a different story, our story; a story about what life can be like when a child with intellectual and physical impairment is born into one’s family. This different story is, in Garland Thompson’s terms, one that “insists that shape structures story” (114) and endeavours to contribute to recasting disability “as an occasion for exuberant flourishing” (Garland Thompson 114). The categorisation and depiction of people with disability in western society’s media have been scrutinised by many writers including Mitchell and Snyder ("Representations"; "Visual"), Oliver and Norden who point out that negatively charged stereotypical representations of the disabled continue to proliferate in the mediasphere. Englandkennedy for example examines the portrayal of the new disability classification Attention Deficit Disorder and is highly critical of its representation in programs such as The Simpsons (1989-2008) and films such as Pecker (1998). She asserts, “few media representations of ADD exist and most are inaccurate; they reflect and reinforce social concerns and negative stereotypes” (117) to the detriment of the condition being better understood by their audiences. However, Englandkennedy also identifies the positive possibilities for informed media representations that offer new models and stories about disability, citing works such as Children of a Lesser God (1986) and The Bone Collector (1999) as examples of shifts in fictional story telling modes. There are also shifts in recent documentary films such as My Flesh and Blood (2004), Tarnation (2003) and Murderball (2005) which provide insightful, powerful and engaging stories about disability. I suggest however that they still rely upon the stereotypical modes identified by numerous disability studies scholars. For example, Darke’s (n. pag.) heroic mother figure and disabled outsider and victim are depicted in the extreme in My Flesh and Blood and Tarnation respectively, whilst Murderball, as powerful as it is, still constructs disability as “something” to be overcome and is celebrated via the character construction of the “super-crip” (Englandkennedy 99). These stories are vital and insightful developments in challenging and re-shaping the many stigmas associated with disability, but they remain, for the most part, inaccessible to me in terms of my place in the world as a person parenting a little girl with physical and intellectual impairment. Able to Live The opening of the film features footage of my two older children Adam and Kristina, as “normal”, active children. These idyllic images are interrupted by an image of me by Allycia’s bedside where, as an infant, she is attached to life saving machines. She is at once “othered” to her active, healthy siblings. Her survival was reliant, and remains so, albeit to a much lesser extent, upon the intrusion of machines, administering of medication and the intervention of strangers. The prospect of her dying rendered me powerless, vulnerable; I lacked the means to sustain her life. To hand over my child to strangers, knowing they would carve her tiny chest open, suspend the beating of her already frail heart and attempt to repair it, was to surrender to the unknown without guarantees; the only surety being she would cease to be if I did not. Allycia survived surgery. This triumph however, was recast in the shadow of abnormality as outlined in the film when genetic screening of her DNA revealed she had been born with a rare genetic abnormality coded as 18q23 deletion. This information meant she was missing a part of her eighteenth chromosome and the literature available at that time (in 1997) gave little cause for hope – she was physically and intellectually retarded. This news, delivered to me by a genetic counsellor, was coupled with advice to ensure my daughter enjoyed “quality of life”. The words, “rare genetic abnormality” and “retarded” succeeded in effectively “othering” Allycia to me, to my other two children and the general population. My knowledge and experience with people with genetic abnormalities was minimal and synonymous with loss, sadness, suffering and sacrifice and had little to do with quality of life. She was frail and I was confronted with the loss of a “normal” child that would surely result in the “loss” of my own life when framed within this bleak, imagined life that lay before me; her disability, her otherness, her vulnerability signalled my own. As unpalatable as it is for me to use the word monstrous with reference to my daughter, Shildrick’s work, aligning the disabled experience with the monstrous and the possibility of becoming via a refiguring of vulnerability, resonates somewhat with my encounter with my vulnerable self. Schildrick proposes that “any being who traverses the liminal spaces that evade classification takes on the potential to confound normative identity” (6). As Allycia’s mother, I find Shildrick’s assertion that the monstrous “remains excessive of any category, it always claims us, always touches us and implicates us in its own becoming” (6) is particularly pertinent. This is not to say that Schildrick’s notion of the monstrous is an unproblematic one. Indeed Kaul reminds us that: to identify disabled bodies too closely with the monstrous seems to risk leaving us out of universal, as well as particular, experience, entirely in the figurative. (11) Schildrick’s notion of the universality of vulnerability however is implicit in her reference to that which confounds and disturbs us, and it is an important one. Clearly Allycia’s arrival has claimed me, touched me; I am intimately implicated in her becoming. I could not have anticipated however the degree to which she has been intertwined with my own becoming. Her arrival, in retrospect crystallised for me Shildrick’s proposition that “we are already without boundaries, already vulnerable” (6). The film does not shy away from the difficulties confronting Allycia and my family and other members of the chromosome 18 community. I have attempted however to portray our environment and culture as contributing factors and challenge the myth of medicine as a perfect science or answer to the myriad of challenges of navigating life with a disability in contemporary society. This was a difficult undertaking as I did not want the work to degenerate into one that was reliant on blame or continued in the construction of people with disability as victims. I have been mindful of balancing the sometimes painful reality of our lives with those moments that have brought us a sense of accomplishment or delight. Part of the delight of our lives is exemplified when my sister Julie articulates the difference in Allycia’s experiences as compared to her own nine year old daughter, Lydia. Julie succeeds in valorising Allycia’s freedom to be herself by juxtaposing her own daughter’s preoccupation with “what others think” and her level of self consciousness in social contexts. Julie also highlights Lydia’s awareness of Allycia’s difference, via narration over footage of Lydia assisting Allycia, and asserts that this role of becoming a helper is a positive attribute for Lydia’s development. Able to Laugh Including humour in the film was a vital ingredient in the reframing of disability in our lives and is employed as a device to enhance the accessibility of the text to an audience. The film is quite dialogue driven in furnishing background knowledge and runs the risk at times, when characters reveal some of their more painful experiences, of degenerating into a tale of despair. Humour acts as device to lift the overall mood of the film. The humour is in part structured by my failures and incompetence – particularly in reference to my command (or rather lack) of public transport both in Australia and overseas. While the events depicted did occur – my missing a ferry and losing our way in the United States – their inclusion in the film is used as a device to show me, as the able bodied person; the adult ‘able’ mother, with flaws and all. This deliberate act endeavours to re-shape the “heroic mother” stereotype. A wistful form of humour also emerges when my vulnerability becomes apparent in a sequence where I break down and cry, feeling the burden in that moment of the first eleven years of Allycia’s life. Here Allycia as carer emerges as she uses our favourite toy to interrupt my crying, succeeding in turning my tears into a gentle smile. Her maturity and ability to connect with my sadness and the need to make me feel better are apparent and serve to challenge the status of intellectual impairment as burden. This sequence also served to help me laugh at myself in quite a different way after spending many hours confronted with the many faces that are mine during the editing process. I experienced a great deal of discomfort in front of the camera due to feelings of self-consciousness and being on display. That discomfort paled into insignificance when I then had to watch myself on the monitor and triggered a parallel journey alongside the making of the film as I continued to view myself over time. Those images showing my distress, my face contorted with tears as I struggled to maintain control made me cry for quite a while afterwards. I felt a strange empathy for myself – as if viewing someone else’s pain although it was mine, simultaneously the same and other. Chris Sarra’s “notion of a common core otherness as constituting the essence of human being” is one that resonates closely with these aspects. Sarra reinterprets Bhaskar (5) arguing that “we should regard the same as a tiny ripple on the sea of otherness”, enabling us “to enshrine the right to be other” capturing “something of the wonder and strangeness of being” (5). Over time I have become used to seeing these images and have laughed at myself. I believe becoming accustomed to seeing myself, aging as I have during these years, has been a useful process. I have become "more" comfortable with seeing that face, my face in another time. In essence I have been required to sit with my own vulnerabilities and have gained a deeper acceptance of my own fragility and in a sense, my own mortality. This idea of becoming “used to”, and more accepting of the images I was previously uncomfortable with has given me a renewed hope for our community in particular, the disability community in general. My experience I believe indicates the potential for us, as we become more visible, to be accepted in our difference. Critical to this is the need for us to be seen in the fullness of human experience, including our capacity to experience laughter and love and the delight these experiences bring to our lives and those around us. These experiences are captured exquisitely when Allycia sees her newfound chromosome 18 friends, Martin and Kathryn kissing one another. She reacts in much the same way I expect other little girls might in a similar situation. She is simultaneously “grossed out” and intrigued, much to our delight. It is a lovely spontaneous moment that says much in the space of a minute about Martin and Kathryn, and about Allycia’s and my relationship. For me there is a beauty, there is honesty and there is transparency. Able to Love My desire for this film is similar to Garland Thomson’s desire for her writing to “provide access to some elements of my community to both disabled and non disabled audiences alike” (122). I felt part of the key to making the film “work” was ensuring it remained accessible to as wide an audience as possible and began with a naive optimism that the film could defy stereotypical story lines. I discovered this accessibility I desired was reliant upon the traditions of storytelling; language, the construction of character and the telling of a journey demanded an engagement in ways we collectively identify and understand (Campbell). I found our lives at times, became stereotypical. I had moments of feeling like a victim; Allycia as a dancer could well be perceived as a “supercrip” and the very act of making a film about my daughter could be viewed as a heroic one. The process resulted in my surrendering to working within a framework that relies upon, all too often, character construction that is stereotypical. I felt despondent many times upon realising the emergence of these in the work, but held onto the belief that something new could be shown by exposing “two narrative currents which are seldom included in the usual stories we tell about disability: sexuality and community” (Garland Thompson 114). The take on sexuality is a gentle one, concerned with emerging ideologies surrounding sexuality in our community. This is a new phenomenon in terms of the “place” of sexuality and intimacy within our community. One of our parents featured in the film makes this clear when he explains that the community is watching a new romance blossom “with interest” (18q) and that this is a new experience for us as a whole. In focussing on sexuality, my intention is to provoke discussion about perceptions surrounding people categorised as intellectually impaired and their capacity to love and build intimate relationships and the possibilities this presents for the chromosome 18 community. The theme of community features significantly in the film as audiences become privy to conferences attended by, in one instance, 300 people. My intention here is to “make our mark”. There has been no significant filmic presence of Chromosome 18. The condition is rare, but when those affected by it are gathered together, a significantly “bigger picture” of is presented where previously there was none. The community is a significant support network for families and is concerned with becoming empowered by knowledge, care and advocacy. The transcendence of global and cultural boundaries becomes apparent in the film as these differences become diminished in light of our greater need to connect with each others’ experiences in life as, or with, people born with genetic difference. The film highlights the supportive, educated and joyful “shape” of our community. In presenting our community I hope too that western society’s preoccupation with normativity and ableism (Goggin) is effectively challenged. In presenting a version of life that “destabilises the system and points up its inadequacy as a model of existential relations”, I am also demonstrating what Shildrick calls “unreflected excess, that which is other than the same” (105). The most significant shift for me has been to refigure my ideas about Allycia as an adult. When I was given her medical prognosis I believed she would be my responsibility for the rest of my life. I did not hold a lot of hope for the future and could not have possibly entertained the idea that she may live independently or heaven forbid, she may enter into an intimate adult relationship; such was my experience with the physically and intellectually impaired. Thankfully I have progressed. This progression has been, in part, due to attending a Chromosome 18 conference in Boston in 2007 where we met Kathryn and Martin, a young couple in the early stages of building a relationship. This is a new phenomenon in our community. Kathryn and Martin were born with chromosome 18 deletions. Meeting them and their families has signalled new possibilities for our children and their opportunities and their right to explore intimate adult relationships. Their relationship has given me confidence to proceed with an open mind regarding Allycia’s adulthood and sexuality. Conclusion The very act of making the film was one that would inevitably render me vulnerable. Placing myself before the camera has given me a new perspective on vulnerability as a state that simultaneously disempowers and empowers me. I could argue this process has given me a better understanding of Allycia’s place in the world, but to do this is to deny our differences. Instead I believe the experience has given me a renewed perspective in embracing our differences and has also enabled me to see how much we are alike. My understanding of myself as both “able” and “othered”, and the ensuing recognition of, and encounter with, my vulnerable self have in some measure, come as a result of being continually confronted with images of myself in the editing process. But more than this, reflecting upon the years since Allycia’s birth I have come to a more intimate understanding and acceptance of myself as a consequence of knowing Allycia. Whereas my experience has been a matter of will, Allycia’s contribution is in the fact that she simply is. These experiences have given me renewed hope of acceptance of people of difference - that over time we as a society may become used to seeing the different face and the different behaviours that often accompany the experience of people living with genetic difference. References Bhaskar, R. Dialectic: The Pulse of Freedom. London: Verso, 1993. Campbell, J. The Hero's Journey: Joseph Campbell on His Life and Work. California: New World Library, 2003 Caouette, J. Tarnation. Dir. J. Caouette. DVD. 2004. Chromosome 18. "Chromosome 18 Research & Registry Society." 2008. 3 March 2008 ‹http://www.chromosome18.org/›. Darke, P. "The Cinematic Construction of Physical Disability as Identified through the Application of the Social Model of Disability to Six Indicative Films Made since 1970: A Day In The Death of Joe Egg (1970), The Raging Moon (1970), The Elephant Man (1980), Whose Life Is It Anyway? (1981), Duet for One (1987) and My Left Foot (1989)." 1999. 10 Feb. 2006 ‹http://www.darke.info/›. Englandkennedy, E. “Media Representations of Attention Deficit Disorder: Portrayals of Cultural Skepticism in Popular Media.” Journal of Popular Culture 41.1 (2008): 91-118. Garland Thomson, R. “Shape Structures Story: Fresh and Feisty Stories about Disability.” Narrative 15.1 (2007): 113-123. –––. Extraordinary Bodies: Figuring Physical Disability in American Culture and Literature. New York: Columbia Univ. Press, 1997. Goggin, G. Division One: Bodies of Knowledge. 2002. 10 Feb. 2006 ‹http://adt.library.qut.edu.au/adt-qut/uploads/approved/adt-QUT20041123.160628/public/02whole.pdf›. Groening, M. The Simpsons. 20th Century Fox Television. 1989-2008. Iacone, J. The Bone Collector. Dir. P. Noyce. DVD. Columbia Pictures Corporation, 1999. Karsh, J. My Flesh and Blood. DVD. San Francisco: Chaiken Films, 2004. Kaul, K. Figuring Disability in Disability Studies: Theory, Policy and Practice. Toronto: York University, 2003. Medoff, M. Children of a Lesser God. Dir. R. Haines. Paramount Pictures, 1986. Mitchell, D. T., and S. L. Snyder. "Representation and Its Discontents: The Uneasy Home of Disability in Literature and Film." In Handbook of Disability Studies, eds. G. L. Albrecht, K. D. Seelman, and M. Bury. Thousand Oaks, CA: Sage, 2001. 195-218. –––. “The Visual Foucauldian: Institutional Coercion and Surveillance in Frederick Wiseman's Multi-Handicapped Documentary Series.” Journal of Medical Humanities 24.3 (2003): 291. Norden, M.F. The Cinema of Isolation. New Brunswick: Rutgers University Press, 1994 Oliver, M. The Politics of Disablement. The Disability Archive UK. University of Leeds, 1990. 3 April 2005 ‹http://www.leeds.ac.uk/disability-studies/archiveuk/Oliver/p%20of%20d%20oliver4.pdf›. Rubin, H. A., and D. A. Shapiro. Murderball. DVD. Paramount Pictures, 2005. Sarra, C. Chris Sarra & The Other. Unpublished manuscript, 2005. Shildrick, M. Embodying the Monster: Encounters with the Vulnerable Self. London: Sage, 2002.Wain, Veronica. 18q – A Valuable Life. Prod. V. Wain. 2008. Waters, J. Pecker. Videocassette. Polar Entertainment, 1998.
APA, Harvard, Vancouver, ISO, and other styles
43

Huang, Angela Lin, Emma Felton, and Christy Collis. "Suburbia." M/C Journal 14, no. 4 (August 25, 2011). http://dx.doi.org/10.5204/mcj.413.

Full text
Abstract:
This special issue of M/C Journal has been prompted by the "Creative Suburbia" symposium held at the Queensland University of Technology in September 2010. The symposium brought together researchers from cultural studies, communication and media studies, cultural geography, urban planning and cultural policy to share research and perspectives while collectively exploring issues around understandings of suburbia and suburban life. The word “suburbia” is almost automatically associated with homogeneity and dullness. But we ask does this "imagined geography" of suburbia match suburbia’s material and experiential geographies? If not, what suburban cultures, economies, and movements might it obscure? Where, and what is suburbia, and how does it work? Despite a renaissance in critiques of the city, attention has largely been focussed on city centres and their inner core, with far less attention paid to the suburbs. As urbanism intensifies across the world—for the first time in history the majority of people live in cities—concerns about environmental degradation and management, social cohesion and the cultural diversity of cities are firmly on the agenda. In Australia, as in many other countries, the suburbs are where most people live and work, and, while metropolitan centres have undergone major changes, so too have their suburbs. Shaping the suburbs today are influences such as technological innovations enabling more people to work from home or to work flexibly. Many suburbs are now busy commercial centres offering a wide range of activities and services. The increasingly multicultural nature of Australian suburbs, enhanced access to mortgages and consumer credit fuelling speculation and consumption, have all contributed to the development of a suburban geography that is very different from the suburbs’ 1950s antecedents. The rise of the "creative city" agenda (Florida) has also contributed to re-positioning cities as creative and cultural powerhouses, where cities are measured by their cultural assets and their creative, innovative workforce. The ARC funded "Creative Suburbia" project, questioned the inner- city focus of the creativity discourse, and looked at the creative workforce and creative activity beyond urban centres, to the outer suburbs of Brisbane and Melbourne. Researchers found plenty of evidence of a creative workforce and local creative communities which challenged the assumption that creative industries are best fostered in a dense inner-urban milieux. In this special issue, we include several papers that examine the experience of creative workers in the suburbs, bringing to the fore implications for urban and cultural policy and suburban community capacity building. The first article in this edition, Terry Flew’s “Right to the City, Desire for the Suburb?,” discusses the rise of research into cities and points out that the paradox here is that much of the recent urbanisation process is in fact suburbanisation. The focus on developing inner-urban cultural amenity has been overplayed, and greater attention needs to be paid to how better enable distributed knowledge systems through high-speed broadband infrastructure. Suburbia has become more multicultural. Maree Pardy’s “Eat, Pray, Swim—Women, Religion and Multiculturalism in the Suburbs” discusses multiculturalism and its intersection in the public spaces of cities and suburbs, raising questions around multicultural democracy. An event organised by Islamic women at a public swimming pool in a Melbourne outer suburb raises tensions around cultural differences in urban public space. As urbanisation intensifies across the world, Australian cities are becoming denser, creating different morphologies of the suburbs and inner-cities. Brisbane, once a low-density, suburban city, has undergone intense urban development since the early 1990s. In “Urban construction, Suburban Dreaming," Emma Felton examines the shift to new, denser forms of living in Brisbane and how this shift is played out in discursive accounts of the city in marketing material during the years of urban renewal in Brisbane. She identifies the ways in which suburbanism is re-asserted in cultural discourses of the “new” city. New research methodologies provide new ways of understanding cultural and social activity. Chris Brennan-Horley’s “Reappraising the Role of Suburban Workplaces in Darwin’s Creative Economy” provides further evidence of creative industries in suburban locations through the lens of a participatory mapping exercise using GIS software. His data and methodology reveal a more complex and nuanced portrait of the creative workforce than that of census statistics on employment, and identify distinct spatial patterns used by creative workers. Such changes and trends illustrate the ever-changing relationship between the experience of place, creativity, and social life. Aneta Podkalicka explores this theme through a case study of a Melbourne-based youth media program called Youthworx to analyze the processes at stake in cultural engagement for marginalised young people. Her research opens up an opportunity to understand "suburbs" empirically, rather than treating "suburbs" as abstract, analytical constructs. In China, as elsewhere, the suburbs provide lower rent and offer a conducive creative ethos. Angela Lin Huang’s “Leaving the City: artists villages in Beijing” shows how artists locational preferences are often overlooked in policies that are aimed to support them. Government policies have either protected or dismantled artists’ settlements and Huang reviews the history of artists’ villages, tracing their migration routes, and investigates artists’ lives on the edge of the city. The logic of government policy causes a distinction between cities and outlying districts that overlooks the basic needs of artists, needs that are not only for a free or affordable place, but also a space for creativity. Belinda Burns in “Untold Tales of the Intra-Suburban Female” tells of the flight of Australian woman from the suburbs in literature. Fictional narratives of flight occurred in narratives women embarked upon journeys of self-realisation previously reserved for men. Alan Davies upturns the idea that the suburbs are places of leisure and retreat with his study of changes to the suburban workforce. Davies's research identifies the suburbs as the location for the majority of the Melbourne workforce, a fact applicable to other Australian cities such as Sydney and Brisbane. Finally, Apperley, Nansen, Arnold, and Wilken in "Broadband in the Burbs" raise questions around the rollout of the NBN and its impact on people living in the suburbs. Their research suggests that, despite claims to the contrary, there will be a "patchwork geography" of media and communication access and use in peoples' homes across the country. Collectively, the articles in this edition address the many changes in life and work occurring in the contemporary suburbs, in the contours of suburban experience, and their shifting cultural value, reflected in suburban representations. What the articles share in common is the recognition of the suburbs as complex and dynamic places that have undergone a significant transformation, undermining an established view that not much happens there. For some writers, this raises questions for urban and cultural policy makers, for others it points to new geographies of creativity, collaboration, and community. As the suburbs continue to grow in scale and complexity, it is evident that their story is still unfolding. Reference Florida, Richard. The Rise of the Creative Class. New York: Basic Books, 2002.
APA, Harvard, Vancouver, ISO, and other styles
44

Rossini Neto, Moacir José, Maria Cristina Rosifini Alves Rezende, João Pedro Justino de Oliveira Limírio, Angelo Camargo Dalben, Maria Isabel Rosifini Alves Rezende, Letícia Maria Pescinini-Salzedas, Laís Maria Pescinini-E-Salzedas, and Leda Maria Pescinini Salzedas. "Estereótipos sobre os idosos: o papel da Universidade na redução do ageismo." ARCHIVES OF HEALTH INVESTIGATION 9, no. 1 (July 26, 2020). http://dx.doi.org/10.21270/archi.v9i1.5098.

Full text
Abstract:
Introdução: O termo ageismo é definido como uma forma de intolerância relacionada com a idade por meio de estereótipos, ou seja, qualquer pessoa poderia ser alvo de discriminação pela idade que tem, sendo os idosos um dos grupos mais vulneráveis. Teoricamente qualquer pessoa pode ser atingida pelo ageísmo ao longo de sua vida, desde que viva o suficiente para envelhecer. Objetivos: O propósito desse trabalho foi apresentar o papel das Universidades no combate ao ageísmo. Métodos: Para a elaboração do presente trabalho as seguintes etapas foram percorridas: estabelecimento da hipótese e objetivos do estudo; estabelecimento de critérios de inclusão e exclusão de artigos (seleção da amostra). Formulou-se a seguinte questão: as Universidades contribuem para a redução do ageísmo? Os artigos foram selecionados utilizando a base de dados The National Library of Medicine, Washington DC (MEDLINE – PubMed) e Google Scholar. As estratégias utilizadas para localizar os artigos tiveram como eixo norteador a pergunta e os critérios de inclusão da revisão, previamente estabelecidos para manter a coerência na busca dos artigos e evitar possíveis vieses. Como descritores foram utilizados os termos “Ageísmo”, “Universidades”; Expectativa de Vida” e “Relação entre Gerações”, acordando com o Decs. Os critérios de inclusão foram artigos publicados em inglês, espanhol e português com os resumos disponíveis, no período compreendido entre 1990-2020. A partir da pesquisa preliminar nas bases de dados, leitura do título e resumo, 20 artigos foram selecionados para leitura na íntegra. Resultados: A Universidade, por meio de seus projetos de extensão universitária voltados aos idosos tem contribuído para redução das atitudes que nutrem papéis sociais estereotipados com base na idade das pessoas. Conclusões: As atividades universitárias voltados ao idoso têm contribuído para redução dos estereótipos mantidos pela sociedade e pelos próprios indivíduos com 60 anos ou mais, contribuindo não só para o bem estar e qualidade de vida desse segmento, como também para que a sociedade se beneficie do contato positivo intergeracional.Descritores: Ageísmo; Resiliência Psicológica; Universidades; Expectativa de Vida; Relação entre Gerações; Qualidade de Vida.ReferênciasOeppen J, Vaupel JW. Limites quebrados à expectativa de vida. Science. 2002; 296:1029-31.IBGE (Instituto Brasileiro de Geografia e Estatística). Tábuas Completas de Mortalidade. Disponivel em: https://www.ibge.gov.br /estatisticas/sociais/populacao/9126-tabuas-completas-de-mortalidade.html?=t=resultados.Aboim S. Narrativas do envelhecimento. Ser velho na sociedade contemporânea. Tempo Social. 2014;26(1):207-32.Vaupel JW, Carey JR, Christensen K, Johnson TE, Yashin AI, Holm NV et al. Biodemographic trajectories of longevity. Science. 1998; 280(5365):855-60.Donizzetti AR. Ageism in an Aging Society: The Role of Knowledge, Anxiety about Aging, and Stereotypes in Young People and Adults. Int J Environ Res Public Health. 2019;16(8):1329.Butler RN. Why Survive? Being Old in America. New York: Harper Rowe; 1975.Iversen TN, Larsen L, Solem PE. A conceptual analysis of ageism. Nord Psychol. 2009;61(3):4-22.Levy BR, Kasl SV, Gill TM. Image of aging scale. Percept Mot Skills. 2004;99(1):208-10.Nelson T. Ageism. In: Nelson T (Ed.), Handbook of prejudice, stereotyping, and discrimination. New York, NY: Psychology Press; 2009. pp-431-40Abrams D, Eller A, Bryant J. An age apart: The effects of intergenerational contact and stereotype threat on performance and intergroup bias. Psychol Aging. 2006;21(4):691-702.Levy BR, Slade MD, Kunkel SR, Kasl SV. Longevity increased by positive self-perceptions of aging. J Pers Soc Psychol. 2002;83(2):261-70.Swift HJ, Abrams D, Lamont RA, Drury L. The risks of ageism model: how ageism and negative attitudes toward age can be a barrier to active aging. Soc Issues Policy Rev. 2017;11(1):195-231.Wurm S, Diehl M, Kornadt AE, Westerhof GJ, Wahl HW. How do views on aging affect health outcomes in adulthood and late life? Explanations for an established connection. Dev Rev. 2017;46:27-43.Meisner BA. A meta-analysis of positive and negative age stereotype priming effects on behavior among older adults. J Gerontol B Psychol Sci Soc Sci. 2012;67(1):13-7.Gil Barreiro M, Trujillo Grás O. Estereotipos hacia los ancianos. Rev Cubana Med Gen Integr. 1997;13(1): 34-8. Piato RS, Capalbo LC, Alves Rezende MIR, Lehfeld LS, Alves Rezende MCR. O papel da Universidade Aberta à Terceira Idade na educação ambiental. Arch Health Invest.2014;3(5):66-71.Schroyen S, Adam S, Marquet M, et al. Communication of healthcare professionals: Is there ageism? Eur J Cancer Care (Engl). 2018;27(1):10.1111.Chrisler JC, Barney A, Palatino B. Ageism can be hazardous to women’s health: ageism, sexism, and stereotypes of older women in the healthcare system. J Soc Issues. 2016;72(1):86-104.Arnold L, Shue CK, Jones D. Implementation of geriatric education into the first and second years of a baccalaureate-MD degree program. Acad Med. 2002;77(9):933-34.Thornhill J 4th, Richeson N, Roberts E. Senior mentor program: a geriatrics focused curriculum. Acad Med. 2002;77(9):934-35.Bates T, Cohan M, Bragg DS, Bedinghaus J. The Medical College of Wisconsin Senior Mentor Program: experience of a lifetime. Gerontol Geriatr Educ. 2006;27(2):93-103.Levy SR. Toward Reducing Ageism: PEACE (Positive Education about Aging and Contact Experiences) Model. Gerontologist. 2018;58(2): 226-32.Abrams D, Eller A, Bryant J. An age apart: the effects of intergenerational contact and stereotype threat on performance and intergroup bias. Psychol Aging. 2006;21(4):691-702.Swift HJ, Abrams D, Marques S. Threat or boost? Social comparison affects older people's performance differently depending on task domain. J Gerontol B Psychol Sci Soc Sci. 2013;68(1):23-30.Pruchno R, Heid AR, Genderson MW. Resilience and successful aging: aligning complementary constructs using a life course approach. Psychol Inquiry. 2015;26(2):200–7.Windle G. The contribution of resilience to healthy ageing. Perspect Public Health. 2012;132(4):159-60.Liébana-Presa C, Andina-Díaz E, Reguera-García MM, Fulgueiras-Carril I, Bermejo-Martínez D, Fernández-Martínez E. Social Network Analysis and Resilience in University Students: An Approach from Cohesiveness. Int J Environ Res Public Health. 2018;15(10):2119.Fernández-Martínez E, Andina-Díaz E, Fernández-Peña R, García-López R, Fulgueiras-Carril I, Liébana-Presa C. Social Networks, Engagement and Resilience in University Students. Int J Environ Res Public Health. 2017;14(12):1488.Montepare JM, Farah KS. Talk of Ages: Using intergenerational classroom modules to engage older and younger students across the curriculum. Gerontol Geriatr Educ. 2018;39(3):385-94.Montepare JM, Farah KS, Doyle A, Dixon J. Becoming an Age-Friendly University (AFU): Integrating a retirement community on campus. Gerontol Geriatr Educ. 2019;40(2):179-93.Andreoletti C, June A. Coalition building to create an Age-Friendly University (AFU). Gerontol Geriatr Educ. 2019;40(2):142-52.Chesser S, Porter M. Charting a future for Canada's first Age-Friendly University (AFU). Gerontol Geriatr Educ. 2019;40(2):153-65.Clark PG, Leedahl SN. Becoming and being an Age-Friendly University (AFU): Strategic considerations and practical implications. Gerontol Geriatr Educ. 2019;40(2):166-78.Leedahl SN, Brasher MS, Estus E, Breck BM, Dennis CB, Clark SC. Implementing an interdisciplinary intergenerational program using the Cyber Seniors® reverse mentoring model within higher education. Gerontol Geriatr Educ. 2018;1-19.Andreoletti C, Howard JL. Bridging the generation gap: Intergenerational service-learning benefits young and old. Gerontol Geriatr Educ. 2018;39(1):46-60.
APA, Harvard, Vancouver, ISO, and other styles
45

Hill, Wes. "Revealing Revelation: Hans Haacke’s “All Connected”." M/C Journal 23, no. 4 (August 12, 2020). http://dx.doi.org/10.5204/mcj.1669.

Full text
Abstract:
In the 1960s, especially in the West, art that was revelatory and art that was revealing operated at opposite ends of the aesthetic spectrum. On the side of the revelatory we can think of encounters synonymous with modernism, in which an expressionist painting was revelatory of the Freudian unconscious, or a Barnett Newman the revelatory intensity of the sublime. By contrast, the impulse to reveal in 1960s art was rooted in post-Duchampian practice, implicating artists as different as Lynda Benglis and Richard Hamilton, who mined the potential of an art that was without essence. If revelatory art underscored modernism’s transcendental conviction, critically revealing work tested its discursive rules and institutional conventions. Of course, nothing in history happens as neatly as this suggests, but what is clear is how polarized the language of artistic revelation was throughout the 1960s. With the international spread of minimalism, pop art, and fluxus, provisional reveals eventually dominated art-historical discourse. Aesthetic conviction, with its spiritual undertones, was haunted by its demystification. In the words of Donald Judd: “a work needs only to be interesting” (184).That art galleries could be sites of timely socio-political issues, rather than timeless intuitions undersigned by medium specificity, is one of the more familiar origin stories of postmodernism. Few artists symbolize this shift more than Hans Haacke, whose 2019 exhibition All Connected, at the New Museum, New York, examined the legacy of his outward-looking work. Born in Germany in 1936, and a New Yorker since 1965, Haacke has been linked to the term “institutional critique” since the mid 1980s, after Mel Ramsden’s coining in 1975, and the increased recognition of kindred spirits such as Mierle Laderman Ukeles, Michael Asher, Martha Rosler, Robert Smithson, Daniel Buren, and Marcel Broodthaers. These artists have featured in books and essays by the likes of Benjamin Buchloh, Hal Foster, and Yve-Alain Bois, but they are also known for their own contributions to art discourse, producing hybrid conceptions of the intellectual postmodern artist as historian, critic and curator.Haacke was initially fascinated by kinetic sculpture in the early 1960s, taking inspiration from op art, systems art, and machine-oriented research collectives such as Zero (Germany), Gruppo N (Italy) and GRAV (France, an acronym of Groupe de Recherche d’Art Visuel). Towards the end of the decade he started to produce more overtly socio-political work, creating what would become a classic piece from this period, Gallery-Goers’ Birthplace and Residence Profile, Part 1 (1969). Here, in a solo exhibition at New York’s Howard Wise Gallery, the artist invited viewers to mark their birthplaces and places of residence on a map. Questioning the statistical demography of the Gallery’s avant-garde attendees, the exhibition anticipated the meticulous sociological character of much of his practice to come, grounding New York art – the centre of the art world – in local, social, and economic fabrics.In the forward to the catalogue of All Connected, New Museum Director Lisa Philips claims that Haacke’s survey exhibition provided a chance to reflect on the artist’s prescience, especially given the flourishing of art activism over the last five or so years. Philips pressed the issue of why no other American art institution had mounted a retrospective of his work in three decades, since his previous survey, Unfinished Business, at the New Museum in 1986, at its former, and much smaller, Soho digs (8). It suggests that other institutions have deemed Haacke’s work too risky, generating too much political heat for them to handle. It’s a reputation the artist has cultivated since the Guggenheim Museum famously cancelled his 1971 exhibition after learning his intended work, Shapolsky et al. Manhattan Real Estate Holdings, A Real Time Social System as of May 1, 1971 (1971) involved research into dubious New York real estate dealings. Guggenheim director Thomas Messer defended the censorship at the time, going so far as to describe it as an “alien substance that had entered the art museum organism” (Haacke, Framing 138). Exposé was this substance Messer dare not name: art that was too revealing, too journalistic, too partisan, and too politically viscid. (Three years later, Haacke got his own back with Solomon R. Guggenheim Museum Board of Trustees, 1974, exposing then Guggenheim board members’ connections to the copper industry in Chile, where socialist president Salvador Allende had just been overthrown with US backing.) All Connected foregrounded these institutional reveals from time past, at a moment in 2019 when the moral accountability of the art institution was on the art world’s collective mind. The exhibition followed high-profile protests at New York’s Whitney Museum and Metropolitan Museum of Art, as well as at Sydney’s Museum of Contemporary Art, the Louvre, and the British Museum. These and other arts organisations have increasingly faced pressures, fostered by social media, to end ties with unethical donors, sponsors, and board members, with activist groups protesting institutional affiliations ranging from immigration detention centre management to opioid and teargas manufacturing. An awareness of the limits of individual agency and autonomy undoubtedly defines this era, with social media platforms intensifying the encumbrances of individual, group, and organisational identities. Hans Haacke, Gallery-Goers’ Birthplace and Residence Profile, Part 1, 1969 Hans Haacke, Gallery-Goers’ Birthplace and Residence Profile, Part 2, 1969-71Unfinished BusinessUnderscoring Haacke’s activist credentials, Philips describes him as “a model of how to live ethically and empathetically in the world today”, and as a beacon of light amidst the “extreme political and economic uncertainty” of the present, Trump-presidency-calamity moment (7). This was markedly different to how Haacke’s previous New York retrospective, Unfinished Business, was received, which bore the weight of being the artist’s first museum exhibition in New York following the Guggenheim controversy. In the catalogue to Haacke’s 1986 exhibition, then New Museum director Marcia Tucker introduced his work as a challenge, cautiously claiming that he poses “trenchant questions” and that the institution accepts “the difficulties and contradictions” inherent to any museum staging of his work (6).Philips’s and Tucker’s distinct perspectives on Haacke’s practice – one as heroically ethical, the other as a sobering critical challenge – exemplify broader shifts in the perception of institutional critique (the art of the socio-political reveal) over this thirty-year period. In the words of Pamela M. Lee, between 1986 and 2019 the art world has undergone a “seismic transformation”, becoming “a sphere of influence at once more rapacious, acquisitive, and overweening but arguably more democratizing and ecumenical with respect to new audiences and artists involved” (87). Haacke’s reputation over this period has taken a similar shift, from him being a controversial opponent of art’s autonomy (an erudite postmodern conceptualist) to a figurehead for moral integrity and cohesive artistic experimentation.As Rosalyn Deutsche pointed out in the catalogue to Haacke’s 1986 exhibition, a potential trap of such a retrospective is that, through biographical positioning, Haacke might be seen as an “exemplary political artist” (210). With this, the specific political issues motivating his work would be overshadowed by the perception of the “great artist” – someone who brings single-issue politics into the narrative of postmodern art, but at the expense of the issues themselves. This is exactly what Douglas Crimp discovered in Unfinished Business. In a 1987 reflection on the show, Crimp argued that, when compared with an AIDS-themed display, Homo Video, staged at the New Museum at the same time, reviewers of Haacke’s exhibition tended to analyse his politics “within the context of the individual artist’s body of work … . Political issues became secondary to the aesthetic strategies of the producer” (34). Crimp, whose activism would be at the forefront of his career in subsequent years, was surprised at how Homo Video and Unfinished Business spawned different readings. Whereas works in the former exhibition tended to be addressed in terms of the artists personal and partisan politics, Haacke’s prompted reflection on the aesthetics-politics juxtaposition itself. For Crimp, the fact that “there was no mediation between these two shows”, spoke volumes about the divisions between political and activist art at the time.New York Times critic Michael Brenson, reiterating a comment made by Fredric Jameson in the catalogue for Unfinished Business, describes the timeless appearance of Haacke’s work in 1986, which is “surprising for an artist whose work is in some way about ideology and history” (Brenson). The implication is that the artist gives a surprisingly long aesthetic afterlife to the politically specific – to ordinarily short shelf-life issues. In this mode of critical postmodernism in which we are unable to distinguish clearly between intervening in and merely reproducing the logic of the system, Haacke is seen as an astute director of an albeit ambiguous push and pull between political specificity and aesthetic irreducibility, political externality and the internalist mode of art about art. Jameson, while granting that Haacke’s work highlights the need to reinvent the role of the “ruling class” in the complex, globalised socio-economic situation of postmodernism, claims that it does so as representative of the “new intellectual problematic” of postmodernism. Haacke, according Jameson, stages postmodernism’s “crisis of ‘mapping’” whereby capitalism’s totalizing, systemic forms are “handled” (note that he avoids “critiqued” or “challenged”) by focusing on their manifestation through particular (“micro-public”) institutional means (49, 50).We can think of the above examples as constituting the postmodern version of Haacke, who frames very specific political issues on the one hand, and the limitless incorporative power of appropriative practice on the other. To say this another way, Haacke, circa 1986, points to specific sites of power struggle at the same time as revealing their generic absorption by an art-world system grown accustomed to its “duplicate anything” parameters. For all of his political intent, the artistic realm, totalised in accordance with the postmodern image, is ultimately where many thought his gestures remained. The philosopher turned art critic Arthur Danto, in a negative review of Haacke’s exhibition, portrayed institutional critique as part of an age-old business of purifying art, maintaining that Haacke’s “crude” and “heavy-handed” practice is blind to how art institutions have always relied on some form of critique in order for them to continue being respected “brokers of spirit”. This perception – of Haacke’s “external” critiques merely serving to “internally” strengthen existing art structures – was reiterated by Leo Steinberg. Supportively misconstruing the artist in the exhibition catalogue, Steinberg writes that Haacke’s “political message, by dint of dissonance, becomes grating and shrill – but shrill within the art context. And while its political effectiveness is probably minimal, its effect on Minimal art may well be profound” (15). Hans Haacke, MOMA Poll, 1970 All ConnectedSo, what do we make of the transformed reception of Haacke’s work since the late 1980s: from a postmodern ouroboros of “politicizing aesthetics and aestheticizing politics” to a revelatory exemplar of art’s moral power? At a period in the late 1980s when the culture wars were in full swing and yet activist groups remained on the margins of what would become a “mainstream” art world, Unfinished Business was, perhaps, blindingly relevant to its times. Unusually for a retrospective, it provided little historical distance for its subject, with Haacke becoming a victim of the era’s propensity to “compartmentalize the interpretive registers of inside and outside and the terms corresponding to such spatial­izing coordinates” (Lee 83).If commentary surrounding this 2019 retrospective is anything to go by, politics no longer performs such a parasitic, oppositional or even dialectical relation to art; no longer is the political regarded as a real-world intrusion into the formal, discerning, longue-durée field of aesthetics. The fact that protests inside the museum have become more visible and vociferous in recent years testifies to this shift. For Jason Farrago, in his review of All Connected for the New York Times, “the fact that no person and no artwork stands alone, that all of us are enmeshed in systems of economic and social power, is for anyone under 40 a statement of the obvious”. For Alyssa Battistoni, in Frieze magazine, “if institutional critique is a practice, it is hard to see where it is better embodied than in organizing a union, strike or boycott”.Some responders to All Connected, such as Ben Lewis, acknowledge how difficult it is to extract a single critical or political strategy from Haacke’s body of work; however, we can say that, in general, earlier postmodern questions concerning the aestheticisation of the socio-political reveal no longer dominates the reception of his practice. Today, rather than treating art and politics are two separate but related entities, like form is to content, better ideas circulate, such as those espoused by Bruno Latour and Jacques Rancière, for whom what counts as political is not determined by a specific program, medium or forum, but by the capacity of any actor-network to disrupt and change a normative social fabric. Compare Jameson’s claim that Haacke’s corporate and museological tropes are “dead forms” – through which “no subject-position speaks, not even in protest” (38) – with Battistoni’s, who, seeing Haacke’s activism as implicit, asks the reader: “how can we take the relationship between art and politics as seriously as Haacke has insisted we must?”Crimp’s concern that Unfinished Business perpetuated an image of the artist as distant from the “political stakes” of his work did not carry through to All Connected, whose respondents were less vexed about the relation between art and politics, with many noting its timeliness. The New Museum was, ironically, undergoing its own equity crisis in the months leading up to the exhibition, with newly unionised staff fighting with the Museum over workers’ salaries and healthcare even as it organised to build a new $89-million Rem Koolhaas-designed extension. Battistoni addressed these disputes at-length, claiming the protests “crystallize perfectly the changes that have shaped the world over the half-century of Haacke’s career, and especially over the 33 years since his last New Museum exhibition”. Of note is how little attention Battistoni pays to Haacke’s artistic methods when recounting his assumed solidarity with these disputes, suggesting that works such as Creating Consent (1981), Helmosboro Country (1990), and Standortkultur (Corporate Culture) (1997) – which pivot on art’s public image versus its corporate umbilical cord – do not convey some special aesthetico-political insight into a totalizing capitalist system. Instead, “he has simply been an astute and honest observer long enough to remind us that our current state of affairs has been in formation for decades”.Hans Haacke, News, 1969/2008 Hans Haacke, Wide White Flow, 1967/2008 Showing Systems Early on in the 1960s, Haacke was influenced by the American critic, artist, and curator Jack Burnham, who in a 1968 essay, “Systems Esthetics” for Artforum, inaugurated the loose conceptualist paradigm that would become known as “systems art”. Here, against Greenbergian formalism and what he saw as the “craft fetishism” of modernism, Burnham argues that “change emanates, not from things, but from the way things are done” (30). Burnham thought that emergent contemporary artists were intuitively aware of the importance of the systems approach: the significant artist in 1968 “strives to reduce the technical and psychical distance between his artistic output and the productive means of society”, and pays particular attention to relationships between organic and non-organic systems (31).As Michael Fried observed of minimalism in his now legendary 1967 essay Art and Objecthood, this shift in sixties art – signalled by the widespread interest in the systematic – entailed a turn towards the spatial, institutional, and societal contexts of receivership. For Burnham, art is not about “material entities” that beautify or modify the environment; rather, art exists “in relations between people and between people and the components of their environment” (31). At the forefront of his mind was land art, computer art, and research-driven conceptualist practice, which, against Fried, has “no contrived confines such as the theatre proscenium or picture frame” (32). In a 1969 lecture at the Guggenheim, Burnham confessed that his research concerned not just art as a distinct entity, but aesthetics in its broadest possible sense, declaring “as far as art is concerned, I’m not particularly interested in it. I believe that aesthetics exists in revelation” (Ragain).Working under the aegis of Burnham’s systems art, Haacke was shaken by the tumultuous and televised politics of late-1960s America – a time when, according to Joan Didion, a “demented and seductive vortical tension was building in the community” (41). Haacke cites Martin Luther King’s assassination as an “incident that made me understand that, in addition to what I had called physical and biological systems, there are also social systems and that art is an integral part of the universe of social systems” (Haacke, Conversation 222). Haacke created News (1969) in response to this awareness, comprising a (pre-Twitter) telex machine that endlessly spits out live news updates from wire services, piling up rolls and rolls of paper on the floor of the exhibition space over the course of its display. Echoing Burnham’s idea of the artist as a programmer whose job is to “prepare new codes and analyze data”, News nonetheless presents the museum as anything but immune from politics, and technological systems as anything but impersonal (32).This intensification of social responsibility in Haacke’s work sets him apart from other, arguably more reductive techno-scientific systems artists such as Sonia Sheridan and Les Levine. The gradual transformation of his ecological and quasi-scientific sculptural experiments from 1968 onwards could almost be seen as making a mockery of the anthropocentrism described in Fried’s 1967 critique. Here, Fried claims not only that the literalness of minimalist work amounts to an emphasis on shape and spatial presence over pictorial composition, but also, in this “theatricality of objecthood” literalness paradoxically mirrors (153). At times in Fried’s essay the minimalist art object reads as a mute form of sociality, the spatial presence filled by the conscious experience of looking – the theatrical relationship itself put on view. Fried thought that viewers of minimalism were presented with themselves in relation to the entire world as object, to which they were asked not to respond in an engaged formalist sense but (generically) to react. Pre-empting the rise of conceptual art and the sociological experiments of post-conceptualist practice, Fried, unapprovingly, argues that minimalist artists unleash an anthropomorphism that “must somehow confront the beholder” (154).Haacke, who admits he has “always been sympathetic to so-called Minimal art” (Haacke, A Conversation 26) embraced the human subject around the same time that Fried’s essay was published. While Fried would have viewed this move as further illustrating the minimalist tendency towards anthropomorphic confrontation, it would be more accurate to describe Haacke’s subsequent works as social-environmental barometers. Haacke began staging interactions which, however dry or administrative, framed the interplays of culture and nature, inside and outside, private and public spheres, expanding art’s definition by looking to the social circulation and economy that supported it.Haacke’s approach – which seems largely driven to show, to reveal – anticipates the viewer in a way that Fried would disapprove, for whom absorbed viewers, and the irreduction of gestalt to shape, are the by-products of assessments of aesthetic quality. For Donald Judd, the promotion of interest over conviction signalled scepticism about Clement Greenberg’s quality standards; it was a way of acknowledging the limitations of qualitative judgement, and, perhaps, of knowledge more generally. In this way, minimalism’s aesthetic relations are not framed so much as allowed to “go on and on” – the artists’ doubt about aesthetic value producing this ongoing temporal quality, which conviction supposedly lacks.In contrast to Unfinished Business, the placing of Haacke’s early sixties works adjacent to his later, more political works in All Connected revealed something other than the tensions between postmodern socio-political reveal and modernist-formalist revelation. The question of whether to intervene in an operating system – whether to let such a system go on and on – was raised throughout the exhibition, literally and metaphorically. To be faced with the interactions of physical, biological, and social systems (in Condensation Cube, 1963-67, and Wide White Flow, 1967/2008, but also in later works like MetroMobiltan, 1985) is to be faced with the question of change and one’s place in it. Framing systems in full swing, at their best, Haacke’s kinetic and environmental works suggest two things: 1. That the systems on display will be ongoing if their component parts aren’t altered; and 2. Any alteration will alter the system as a whole, in minor or significant ways. Applied to his practice more generally, what Haacke’s work hinges on is whether or not one perceives oneself as part of its systemic relations. To see oneself implicated is to see beyond the work’s literal forms and representations. Here, systemic imbrication equates to moral realisation: one’s capacity to alter the system as the question of what to do. Unlike the phenomenology-oriented minimalists, the viewer’s participation is not always assumed in Haacke’s work, who follows a more hermeneutic model. In fact, Haacke’s systems are often circular, highlighting participation as a conscious disruption of flow rather than an obligation that emanates from a particular work (148).This is a theatrical scenario as Fried describes it, but it is far from an abandonment of the issue of profound value. In fact, if we accept that Haacke’s work foregrounds intervention as a moral choice, it is closer to Fried’s own rallying cry for conviction in aesthetic judgement. As Rex Butler has argued, Fried’s advocacy of conviction over sceptical interest can be understood as dialectical in the Hegelian sense: conviction is the overcoming of scepticism, in a similar way that Geist, or spirit, for Hegel, is “the very split between subject and object, in which each makes the other possible” (Butler). What is advanced for Fried is the idea of “a scepticism that can be remarked only from the position of conviction and a conviction that can speak of itself only as this scepticism” (for instance, in his attempt to overcome his scepticism of literalist art on the basis of its scepticism). Strong and unequivocal feelings in Fried’s writing are informed by weak and indeterminate feeling, just as moral conviction in Haacke – the feeling that I, the viewer, should do something – emerges from an awareness that the system will continue to function fine without me. In other words, before being read as “a barometer of the changing and charged atmosphere of the public sphere” (Sutton 16), the impact of Haacke’s work depends upon an initial revelation. It is the realisation not just that one is embroiled in a series of “invisible but fundamental” relations greater than oneself, but that, in responding to seemingly sovereign social systems, the question of our involvement is a moral one, a claim for determination founded through an overcoming of the systemic (Fry 31).Haacke’s at once open and closed works suit the logic of our algorithmic age, where viewers have to shift constantly from a position of being targeted to one of finding for oneself. Peculiarly, when Haacke’s online digital polls in All Connected were hacked by activists (who randomized statistical responses in order to compel the Museum “to redress their continuing complacency in capitalism”) the culprits claimed they did it in sympathy with his work, not in spite of it: “we see our work as extending and conversing with Haacke’s, an artist and thinker who has been a source of inspiration to us both” (Hakim). This response – undermining done with veneration – is indicative of the complicated legacy of his work today. Haacke’s influence on artists such as Tania Bruguera, Sam Durant, Forensic Architecture, Laura Poitras, Carsten Höller, and Andrea Fraser has less to do with a particular political ideal than with his unique promotion of journalistic suspicion and moral revelation in forms of systems mapping. It suggests a coda be added to the sentiment of All Connected: all might not be revealed, but how we respond matters. Hans Haacke, Large Condensation Cube, 1963–67ReferencesBattistoni, Alyssa. “After a Contract Fight with Its Workers, the New Museum Opens Hans Haacke’s ‘All Connected’.” Frieze 208 (2019).Bishara, Hakim. “Hans Haacke Gets Hacked by Activists at the New Museum.” Hyperallergic 21 Jan. 2010. <https://hyperallergic.com/538413/hans-haacke-gets-hacked-by-activists-at-the-new-museum/>.Brenson, Michael. “Art: In Political Tone, Works by Hans Haacke.” New York Times 19 Dec. 1988. <https://www.nytimes.com/1986/12/19/arts/artin-political-tone-worksby-hans-haacke.html>.Buchloh, Benjamin. “Hans Haacke: Memory and Instrumental Reason.” Neo-Avantgarde and Culture Industry. Cambridge: MIT P, 2000.Burnham, Jack. “Systems Esthetics.” Artforum 7.1 (1968).Butler, Rex. “Art and Objecthood: Fried against Fried.” Nonsite 22 (2017). <https://nonsite.org/feature/art-and-objecthood>.Carrion-Murayari, Gary, and Massimiliano Gioni (eds.). Hans Haacke: All Connected. New York: Phaidon and New Museum, 2019.Crimp, Douglas. “Strategies of Public Address: Which Media, Which Publics?” In Hal Foster (ed.), Discussions in Contemporary Culture, no. 1. Washington: Bay P, 1987.Danto, Arthur C. “Hans Haacke and the Industry of Art.” In Gregg Horowitz and Tom Huhn (eds.), The Wake of Art: Criticism, Philosophy, and the Ends of Taste. London: Routledge, 1987/1998.Didion, Joan. The White Album. London: 4th Estate, 2019.Farago, Jason. “Hans Haacke, at the New Museum, Takes No Prisoners.” New York Times 31 Oct. 2019. <https://www.nytimes.com/2019/10/31/arts/design/hans-haacke-review-new-museum.html>.Fried, Michael. “Art and Objecthood.” Artforum 5 (June 1967).Fry, Edward. “Introduction to the Work of Hans Haacke.” In Hans Haacke 1967. Cambridge: MIT List Visual Arts Center, 2011.Glueck, Grace. “The Guggenheim Cancels Haacke’s Show.” New York Times 7 Apr. 1971.Gudel, Paul. “Michael Fried, Theatricality and the Threat of Skepticism.” Michael Fried and Philosophy. New York: Routledge, 2018.Haacke, Hans. Hans Haacke: Framing and Being Framed: 7 Works 1970-5. Halifax: P of the Nova Scotia College of Design and New York: New York UP, 1976.———. “Hans Haacke in Conversation with Gary Carrion-Murayari and Massimiliano Gioni.” Hans Haacke: All Connected. New York: Phaidon and New Museum, 2019.Haacke, Hans, et al. “A Conversation with Hans Haacke.” October 30 (1984).Haacke, Hans, and Brian Wallis (eds.). Hans Haacke: Unfinished Business. New York: New Museum of Contemporary Art; Cambridge, Mass: MIT P, 1986.“Haacke’s ‘All Connected.’” Frieze 25 Oct. 2019. <https://frieze.com/article/after-contract-fight-its-workers-new-museum-opens-hans-haackes-all-connected>.Judd, Donald. “Specific Objects.” Complete Writings 1959–1975. Halifax: P of the Nova Scotia College of Design and New York: New York UP, 1965/1975.Lee, Pamela M. “Unfinished ‘Unfinished Business.’” Hans Haacke: All Connected. New York: Phaidon P Limited and New Museum, 2019.Ragain, Melissa. “Jack Burnham (1931–2019).” Artforum 19 Mar. 2019. <https://www.artforum.com/passages/melissa-ragain-on-jack-burnham-78935>.Sutton, Gloria. “Hans Haacke: Works of Art, 1963–72.” Hans Haacke: All Connected. New York: Phaidon P Limited and New Museum, 2019.Tucker, Marcia. “Director’s Forward.” Hans Haacke: Unfinished Business. New York: New Museum of Contemporary Art; Cambridge, Mass: MIT P, 1986.
APA, Harvard, Vancouver, ISO, and other styles
46

Dela Cruz, Luisito. "Governing the Philippine Public: The National College of Public Administration and Governance and the Crisis of Leadership without Identity." Scientia - The International Journal on the Liberal Arts 9, no. 1 (March 30, 2020). http://dx.doi.org/10.57106/scientia.v9i1.116.

Full text
Abstract:
This paper examines the manner of reconciling the concepts of Public Administration as a discipline and the contemporary actual realities in the Philippines as carried out by the National College of Public Administration and Governance of the University of the Philippines, Diliman. As a center of academic excellence and bestowed with the mandate of advancing nation-building into which utterance of identity is an implicit element, there is no other academic institution where expectations to advance the development of a ‘grounded’ public policy is so high than the said College. The paper studies the research direction of the NCPAG vis a vis its role in strengthening Philippine Public Administration both as discipline and praxis by developing approaches that are culturally and socially grounded in the Philippine society. The paper however limited its scrutiny to the epistemological element of the researches. Through content analysis, the article analyzed the theoretical frameworks used in the dissertations covered by the study and tries to answer the question of whether or not there is an attempt to develop, let alone to utilize in its analysis of phenomena, an indigenous theory. Initial results of the study had been juxtaposed to the academic orientation, research interests, and history of the College. References Books: Abueva, J. (1995). The Presidency and the Nation-State. In P. Tapales & N. Pilar (Eds.), Public Administration by the Year 2000: Looking Back into the Future (pp. 575-582). Quezon City: College of Public Administration. Abueva, J. (2007). From IPA to NCPAG: Some Reflections. In C. Alfiler (Ed.), Public Administration plus Governance: Assessing the Past, Addressing the Future (pp. 675-684). Quezon City: National College of Public Administration and Governance. Alfiler, M. C. Public Administration plus Governance: Assessing the Past, Addressing the Future. Quezon City: National College of Public Administration and Governance, 2007. Cariño, L. (2007). Traditional Public Administration to Governance: Research in NCPAG, 1952-2002, Public Administration plusGovernance: Assessing the Past, Addressing the Future (pp. 685-706). Quezon City:National College of Public Administration and Governance. Reyes, D. (1995). Life Begins at Forty: An Inquiry on Administrative Theory in the Philippines and the Structure of Scientific Revelations. In P. Tapales & N. Pilar (Eds.), Public Administration by the Year 2000: Looking Back into the Future (pp. 18-73). Quezon City: College of Public Administration. Tapales, P. & Pilar, N. Public Administration by the Year 2000: Looking Back into the Future. Quezon City: National College of Public Administration and Governance, 1995. Journal Articles: Abueva, J. “Ideals and Practice in the Study of Public Administration and Governance.” Philippine Journal of Public Administration 52, nos. 2-4 (2008): 119-138. Brillantes, A. & Fernandez, M. “Is There a Philippine Public Administration? Or Better Still For Whom is Philippines Public Administration.” Philipine Journal of Public Administration 52, nos. 2-4 (2008). Brillantes, A. & Fernandez, M. “Theory and Practice of Public Administration in the Philippines: Concerns for an Identity Crisis.” Asian Journal of Political Science 21, no. 1 (2013): 80-101. Brillantes, A. & Montes, R. “Federalism: Logical Step After Devolution?” Philippine Journal of Public Administration 51, nos. 1-4 (2007): 1-32. Cariño, L. “From Traditional Public Administration to Governance Tradition.” Philippine Journal of Public Administration 50, nos. 1-4 (2006): 1-22. Cariño, L. “Is There a Philippine Public Administration?” Philippine Journal of Public Administration 30, no. 4 (1986): 375-381. Corpuz, O. “Is There a Philippine Public Administration?” Philippine Journal of Public Administration 30, no. 4 (1986): 368-374. Dela Cruz, L. “Research Directions and Trajectory of the University of the Philippines Asian Center.” Scientia 4, no. 1 (2015): 48-67. Dela Cruz, L. “The Language of the Self: A Critical Assessment of Filipino Philosophy Theses Exploring the Filipino Self in University of the Philippines – Diliman.” Scientia 4, no. 2 (2015): 144-171. De Guzman, R. “Is There a Philippine Public Administration?.” Philippine Journal of Public Administration, 30, no. 4 (1986): 375-382. Domingo, M.O. “Indigenous Leadership and Governance.” Philippine Journal of Public Administration 48, nos. 1 & 2 (2004): 1-32. Englehart, J. “The Marriage between Theory and Practice.” Public Administration Review 61, no. 3 (2001): 371-374. Haque, M. S. “Theory and Practice of Public Administration in Southeast Asia: Traditions, Directions, and Impacts.” International Journal of Public Administration 30 (2007): 1297-1326. Hodder, R. “The Philippine Legislature and Social Relationships: Toward the Formalization of the Polity?” Philippine Studies 53, no. 4 (2005): 563-598. Llanera, T. “Ethnocentrism: Lessons from Richard Rorty to Randy David.” Philippine Sociological Review 65, special issue (2017): 135-149. Nolasco, L. “Prehistory and Early History of Philippine Public Administration.” Philippine Journal of Public Administration 55, nos. 1 & 2 (2011): 21-46. Penalosa, M. C. “Administrative Reform and Indigenization.” Philippine Journal of Public Administration 58, no. 2 (2014): 195-223. Rafael, E. “Philippine Problems are Problems of Modernity, Not of Transition.” Philippine Sociological Review 65, special issue (2017): 151-175. Reyes, D. “The Identity Crisis in Philippine Public Administration Revisited.” Philippine Journal of Public Administration 23, no. 1 (1979): 1-19. Reyes, D. “The Study of Administrative History: Philippine Public Administration as an Historical Discipline.” Philippine Journal of Public Administration 52, nos. 2-4 (2008). Ricote, E. “Philippine Public Administration as a Field of Study, Enduring and Emerging Areas, Challenges, and Prospects.” Philippine Journal of Public Administration 52, nos. 2- 4 (2008): 167-194. Sampaco-Baddiri, M. “New Institutionalism and Public Administration.” Philippine Journal of Public Administration 55, nos. 1 & 2 (2011): 1-20. Sto. Tomas, P. & Mangahas, J. “Public Administration and Governance.” Philippine Journal of Public Administration 50, nos. 1-4 (2006): 54-89. Thornhill, C. & Van Dijk, G. “Public Administration Theory: Justification for Conceptualisation.” Journal of Public Administration 45, no. 1.1 (2010): 95-110. Wilson, W. “The Study of Administration.” Political Science Quarterly 2, no. 2 (1887): 197-222. Unpublished Dissertations Abad-Sarmiento, L. (2005). An Assessment of the Administrative Capability of Local Governments in the National Capital Region in Implementing the Gender Mainstreaming Policy. (Unpublished doctoral dissertation). University of the Philippines, Quezon City, Philippines. Abdon Jr., N.B. (November 2000). Religiosity, Ethical Practice and Performance: The Case of the Bureau of Internal Revenue. (Unpublished doctoral dissertation). University of the Philippines, Quezon City, Philippines. Abdulrachman, S.M. (June 1991). The Relationship Between Religious Beliefs and Public Responsibility: A Case Study Among Maranao Muslim Public Administrators. (Unpublished doctoral dissertation). University of the Philippines, Quezon City, Philippines. Alcid, R.G. (March 2007). E-Governance Perspective to Strengthen the Policy and Institutional Framework for ICT in the Philippines. (Unpublished doctoral dissertation). University of the Philippines, Quezon City, Philippines. Ati, M.P. (December 1996). Process Assessment of the Implementation of Integrated Approach to Local Development Management in Davao City. (Unpublished doctoral dissertation). University of the Philippines, Quezon City, Philippines. Bajao, A.R. (2009). Philippine Counterinsurgency Programs From Marcos to Arroyo: A Study in National Security Administration. (Unpublished doctoral dissertation). University of the Philippines, Quezon City, Philippines. Bambalan, G.C. (2005). Elements of Sustainability in Philippine Forest Governance: An Analysis of the Community-Based Forest Management and Integrated Forest Management Programs in Isabela, Quirino, Aurora, and Negros Oriental, Philippines. (Unpublished doctoral dissertation). University of the Philippines, Quezon City, Philippines. Bautista-Cruz, C. (April 2007). Strengthening Institutional Capacity for Disaster Reduction: The Cases of the Local Governments of Marikina, Pasig, and Pateros. (Unpublished doctoral dissertation). University of the Philippines, Quezon City, Philippines. Boceta, N.M. (March 2003). The Development and Regulatory Functions of the Philippine Coconut Authority: 1973-2000. (Unpublished doctoral dissertation). University of the Philippines, Quezon City, Philippines. Buendia, E.E. (May 2001). Democratizing Governance in the Philippines: Redefining and measuring the State of People’s Participation in Governance. (Unpublished doctoral dissertation). University of the Philippines, Quezon City, Philippines. Caraan, H.S. (2010). Public-Private Sectors’ Role in the Clean Administration of Labor Justice: Transforming a Problematic Confluence into a Confluent Solution. (Unpublished doctoral dissertation). University of the Philippines, Quezon City, Philippines. Carmona, C.V. (November 2003). Judicial Review of Economic Policies: Implications on Policymaking and Implementation. (Unpublished doctoral dissertation). University of the Philippines, Quezon City, Philippines. Clavejo, L.A. (April 2008). Strategies for Crisis Management: The Responses of China to SARS and Avian Flu Pandemics and Lessons for the Philippines. (Unpublished doctoral dissertation). University of the Philippines, Quezon City, Philippines. Co, E.A. (July 1997). Management Policy Formulation: The Generics Act of 1988. (Unpublished doctoral dissertation). University of the Philippines, Quezon City, Philippines. Cuaresma, J.C. (April 13, 2008). Institutionalization of Geographic Information System for RPTA in Seven Philippine Local Government Units: Enabling and Hindering Factors. (Unpublished doctoral dissertation). University of the Philippines, Quezon City, Philippines. Dimzon, C. (October 2003). An Evaluation of the Pre-Departure Orientation Seminar Program for Women Overseas Household Workers: Implications for Good Governance. (Unpublished doctoral dissertation). University of the Philippines, Quezon City, Philippines. De Vera III, J.E. (July 1999). A Comparative Study of Policy Decisions on Population Management in Selected Local Legislative Bodies in Pangasinan and Cebu. (Unpublished doctoral dissertation). University of the Philippines, Quezon City, Philippines. Domingo, M.Z. (November 2004). Good Governance of Civil Society Organizations and the Role of Boards. (Unpublished doctoral dissertation). University of the Philippines, Quezon City, Philippines. Domingo-Almase, A.D. (March 2007). A Saga of Administrative Thought in Presidential Rhetoric: An Analysis of the State of the Nation Addresses and Speeches of Philippine Presidents, 1935-2006. (Unpublished doctoral dissertation). University of the Philippines, Quezon City, Philippines. Doncillo, H.V. (June 1995). Beneficiaries and Business Sector Participation, Administrative Capability and Effectiveness of a Solid Waste Management Service: The Case of Metro Cebu. (Unpublished doctoral dissertation). University of the Philippines, Quezon City, Philippines. Dumrichob, S. (June 1990). An Assessment of a Rural Employment Program: The Case of the Program for Rural Employment Creation in Thailand. (Unpublished doctoral dissertation). University of the Philippines, Quezon City, Philippines. Eclar, V.B. (April 1991). Analysis of Policies and Factors Affecting Successful Commercialization of Technologies. (Unpublished doctoral dissertation). University of the Philippines, Quezon City, Philippines. Espinoza-Abadingo, L.M. (April 1990).The Administration of Elections in the Philippines: A Study of the Commission on Elections. (Unpublished doctoral dissertation). University of the Philippines, Quezon City, Philippines. Ferrer, O.P. (May 2006). Community Governance: Understanding Community Processes and Initiatives. (Unpublished doctoral dissertation). University of the Philippines, Quezon City, Philippines. Francisco, R.B. (March 2007). Sound Development Management in Urban Renewal and Slum Upgrading: The Case of National Government Center (West Side) Commonwealth Avenue, Quezon City. (Unpublished doctoral dissertation). University of the Philippines, Quezon City, Philippines. Gaffud, R.B. (March 1995). Strengthening Market Leverage of People’s Enterprise and Promoting Self-Reliance: A Framework for Collaboration Between Cooperatives and Local Governments. (Unpublished doctoral dissertation). University of the Philippines, Quezon City, Philippines. Garcia, J.G. (November 1995). Academe-Based Extension Services for Agricultural Development: A Study of the Administration of a Comprehensive UPLB Project. (Unpublished doctoral dissertation). University of the Philippines, Quezon City, Philippines. Garcia Jr., M.F. (November 1995). Reorganization of the Philippine Fisheries Research System. (Unpublished doctoral dissertation). University of the Philippines, Quezon City, Philippines. Gavino Jr., J.C. (1992). A Critical Study of the Regulation of the Telephone Utility: Some Options for Policy Development. (Unpublished doctoral dissertation). University of the Philippines, Quezon City, Philippines. Genato-Rebullida, M.G. (April 1990). Church Development Perspective: Policy Formulation and Implementation. (Unpublished doctoral dissertation). University of the Philippines, Quezon City, Philippines. Gonzales, B.V. (2009). The Development Promise of Corporate Social Responsibility in Education: Energy Development Corporation’s Role in Improving School Performance. (Unpublished doctoral dissertation). University of the Philippines, Quezon City, Philippines. Gonzales, E. (1972-1990). The Philippine Agrarian Reform Program. (Unpublished doctoral dissertation). University of the Philippines, Quezon City, Philippines. Hofer, D.K. (April 2005). Local Government Unit Bond Flotation for Financing Development in the Philippine Setting: Case Studies and Vital Lessons Learned. (Unpublished doctoral dissertation). University of the Philippines, Quezon City, Philippines. Imdad, M.P. (2010). Dynamics and Perspectives of Aid Management in the Philippines: Achievements, Challenges, and the Way Forward. (Unpublished doctoral dissertation). University of the Philippines, Quezon City, Philippines. Jimenez, G.P. (2005). Selected Credit Programs for Farmer-Based Postharvest Enterprise: An Assessment. (Unpublished doctoral dissertation). University of the Philippines, Quezon City, Philippines. Lamarca, F.J. (April 1992). The Tobacco Contract Growing Project of the National Tobacco Administration in the Province of La Union: An Assessment of Administrative Capability, Participation, Trading Practices and Effectiveness. (Unpublished doctoral dissertation). University of the Philippines, Quezon City, Philippines. Legaspi, P.E. (March 1990). The Genesis, Viability, and Effectiveness of Community Organizations: The Case of Pangasinan Credit Cooperatives. (Unpublished doctoral dissertation). University of the Philippines, Quezon City, Philippines. Legayada, B.L. (October 1992). Career Advancement of Women Managers in the Philippine Bureaucracy: A Case Study of Region VI. (Unpublished doctoral dissertation). University of the Philippines, Quezon City, Philippines. Librea, R.C. (January 2010). Mainstreaming Human Rights-Based Approach in Selected Development and Governance Projects. (Unpublished doctoral dissertation). University of the Philippines, Quezon City, Philippines. Macaayong, H.W. (May 1992). Small and Medium Enterprises Development: A Study on Program Administration and Effectiveness in the Province of Lanao Del Sur. (Unpublished doctoral dissertation). University of the Philippines, Quezon City, Philippines. Mallari, N.H. (1994). Political Economy of Philippine Public Enterprises. (Unpublished doctoral dissertation). University of the Philippines, Quezon City, Philippines. Maxino-Yorobe, G.A. (November 1995). Administrative Factors in Agricultural R and D Projects. (Unpublished doctoral dissertation). University of the Philippines, Quezon City, Philippines. Legaspi, P.E. (March 1990). The Genesis, Viability, and Effectiveness of Community Organizations: The Case of Pangasinan Credit Cooperatives. (Unpublished doctoral dissertation). University of the Philippines, Quezon City, Philippines. Morato, E.A. (2004). Policies and Strategies for Promoting Entrepreneurship and Enterprise Development. (Unpublished doctoral dissertation). University of the Philippines, Quezon City, Philippines. Moreno, F. (2004). Good Governance in Microcredit Strategy for Poverty Reduction: Focus on Western Mindanao. (Unpublished doctoral dissertation). University of the Philippines, Quezon City, Philippines. Navarro, R.L. (April 1992). Public-Private Partnership in Development Administration: GO-NGO Collaboration in Agricultural Development. (Unpublished doctoral dissertation). University of the Philippines, Quezon City, Philippines. Noval, M.G. (June 1994). Measuring and Accessing the Quality, Equity, and Efficiency of Public Hospitals in the Philippines. (Unpublished doctoral dissertation). University of the Philippines, Quezon City, Philippines. Ogbinar, E.R. (1990). The Role of Government in the Development of the Philippine Maritime Industry and in the Promotion of Maritime Safety. (Unpublished doctoral dissertation). University of the Philippines, Quezon City, Philippines. Oguejiofor, A.C. (March 2010). Challenges to Microfinance as a Poverty Reduction Strategy: Evidences from the Philippines. (Unpublished doctoral dissertation). University of the Philippines, Quezon City, Philippines. Ortiz, J.I. (March 2002). Participatory Development Planning; The Bondoc Development Program Experience. (Unpublished doctoral dissertation). University of the Philippines, Quezon City, Philippines. Paje, R.P. (June 1999). Decentralizing Philippine Environment and Natural Resources Management: An Analysis of the Devolution of Community-Based Upland Development Programs. (Unpublished doctoral dissertation). University of the Philippines, Quezon City, Philippines. Panganiban, E.M. (1990). Toward a Democratic-Efficient Framework of Local Government in the Philippines: Some Policy Criteria. (Unpublished doctoral dissertation). University of the Philippines, Quezon City, Philippines. Prakash, I.G. (October 2006). Partnership Among Government, Private Sector and Civil Society: Improving Services in the Philippine Disability Sector. (Unpublished doctoral dissertation). University of the Philippines, Quezon City, Philippines. Pujiono (1998). An Assessment of the Administrative Capability for Disaster Preparedness of Three Municipalities. (Unpublished doctoral dissertation). University of the Philippines, Quezon City, Philippines. Reyes, D. (June 1995). A Search for Heritage. An Analysis of Trends and Content of Public Administration Literature at UP College of Public Administration, 1952-1992. (Unpublished doctoral dissertation). University of the Philippines, Quezon City, Philippines. Reyes, J.C. (June 1993). Administration for Research Utilization: An Analysis of Five Agricultural Research Organizations. (Unpublished doctoral dissertation). University of the Philippines, Quezon City, Philippines. Reyes, R.E. (October 2008). Corporate Governance and the Clark Development Corporation: A Case Study. (Unpublished doctoral dissertation). University of the Philippines, Quezon City, Philippines. Rodriguez, A.S. (October 2001). An Operational Model to Institutionalize Knowledge Management in the Philippines: Lessons on Knowledge Management Practices From the 5th Countryn Programme for Children. (Unpublished doctoral dissertation). University of the Philippines, Quezon City, Philippines. Rodriguez, M.P. (June 2002). A Privatized Corporation in Transition: A Study of Organization Culture. (Unpublished doctoral dissertation). University of the Philippines, Quezon City, Philippines. Salvosa, C.R. (April 2007). Assessing Governance Performance of Selected Primary Cooperatives in the Philippines. (Unpublished doctoral dissertation). University of the Philippines, Quezon City, Philippines. Sam, R.A. (2002). Farmers’ Cooperatives in Conflict-Ridden Areas: The Maguindanao Experience. (Unpublished doctoral dissertation). University of the Philippines, Quezon City, Philippines. Sanchez, L.V. (July 1990). The Katarungang Pambarangay: Justice at the Grassroots. (Unpublished doctoral dissertation). University of the Philippines, Quezon City, Philippines. Serrano, C.P. (June 1990). The Administrative Capacity of the Iskolar ng Bayan Program (STFAP): An early evaluation. (Unpublished doctoral dissertation). University of the Philippines, Quezon City, Philippines. Serrano, D.J. (July 2005). Dynamics of Policy Formulation: The Passage of the Ecological Solid Waste Management Act. (Unpublished doctoral dissertation). University of the Philippines, Quezon City, Philippines. Serrona, E.R. (October 1992). The Northern Samar Integrated Rural Development Project: A Study in Rural Development Administration. (Unpublished doctoral dissertation). University of the Philippines, Quezon City, Philippines. Sonsri, G. (October 2005). Analysis of Motivational Factors Influencing the Performance of Municipal Government Employees in Public Service Delivery: The Case of Two Selected Metropolitan Municipalities in Thailand. (Unpublished doctoral dissertation). University of the Philippines, Quezon City, Philippines. Subramanian, K.S. (June 1993). Financial Administration of Indian Railways. (Unpublished doctoral dissertation). University of the Philippines, Quezon City, Philippines. Swaminathan, R. (July 1993). State Interventions in Integrated Urban Development: A Study of the Program, Resource, and Institutional Dimensions of Two ADB Assisted Projects in Indonesia. (Unpublished doctoral dissertation). University of the Philippines, Quezon City, Philippines. Tabion, G.S. (March 1993). The Capability of the Barangay as a Management Unit to Absorb Devolved Functions: Case Studies of 15 Barangays in the Province of Tarlac. (Unpublished doctoral dissertation). University of the Philippines, Quezon City, Philippines. Tabunda Jr., C.C. (2010). The Comprehensive Agrarian Reform Program: The Experiences of Three Municipalities in Cavite – Challenges and Future Directions. (Unpublished doctoral dissertation). University of the Philippines, Quezon City, Philippines. Tanggol, S.D. (November 1992). Autonomous Region in Muslim Mindanao: Towards a More Effective, Responsive, and Implementable Policy. (Unpublished doctoral dissertation). University of the Philippines, Quezon City, Philippines. Tigno, J.V. (October 2003). Governance and Public Policy in the Philippines: RA 8042 and the Deregulation of the Overseas Employment Sector. (Unpublished doctoral dissertation). University of the Philippines, Quezon City, Philippines. Torres, J.I. (April 2007). Socially Responsible Improvements in Working Conditions: Implications on Policy and Programs. (Unpublished doctoral dissertation). University of the Philippines, Quezon City, Philippines. Villamejor-Mendoza, M.V. (October 2003). Regulation in the Philippine Electricity Industry: Lessons of the Past and Implications on Governance. (Unpublished doctoral dissertation). University of the Philippines, Quezon City, Philippines. Electronic Source: NCPAG. (n.d.). National College of Public Administration and Governance History. Retrieved November 30, 2019, from http://www.ncpag.up.edu.ph
APA, Harvard, Vancouver, ISO, and other styles
47

Roney, Lisa. "The Extreme Connection Between Bodies and Houses." M/C Journal 10, no. 4 (August 1, 2007). http://dx.doi.org/10.5204/mcj.2684.

Full text
Abstract:
Perhaps nothing in media culture today makes clearer the connection between people’s bodies and their homes than the Emmy-winning reality TV program Extreme Makeover: Home Edition. Home Edition is a spin-off from the original Extreme Makeover, and that fact provides in fundamental form the strong connection that the show demonstrates between bodies and houses. The first EM, initially popular for its focus on cosmetic surgery, laser skin and hair treatments, dental work, cosmetics and wardrobe for mainly middle-aged and self-described unattractive participants, lagged after two full seasons and was finally cancelled entirely, whereas EMHE has continued to accrue viewers and sponsors, as well as accolades (Paulsen, Poniewozik, EMHE Website, Wilhelm). That viewers and the ABC network shifted their attention to the reconstruction of houses over the original version’s direct intervention in problematic bodies indicates that sites of personal transformation are not necessarily within our own physical or emotional beings, but in the larger surround of our environments and in our cultural ideals of home and body. One effect of this shift in the Extreme Makeover format is that a seemingly wider range of narrative problems can be solved relating to houses than to the particular bodies featured on the original show. Although Extreme Makeover featured a few people who’d had previously botched cleft palate surgeries or mastectomies, as Cressida Heyes points out, “the only kind of disability that interests the show is one that can be corrected to conform to able-bodied norms” (22). Most of the recipients were simply middle-aged folks who were ordinary or aged in appearance; many of them seemed self-obsessed and vain, and their children often seemed disturbed by the transformation (Heyes 24). However, children are happy to have a brand new TV and a toy-filled room decorated like their latest fantasy, and they thereby can be drawn into the process of identity transformation in the Home Edition version; in fact, children are required of virtually all recipients of the show’s largess. Because EMHE can do “major surgery” or simply bulldoze an old structure and start with a new building, it is also able to incorporate more variety in its stories—floods, fires, hurricanes, propane explosions, war, crime, immigration, car accidents, unscrupulous contractors, insurance problems, terrorist attacks—the list of traumas is seemingly endless. Home Edition can solve any problem, small or large. Houses are much easier things to repair or reconstruct than bodies. Perhaps partly for this reason, EMHE uses disability as one of its major tropes. Until Season 4, Episode 22, 46.9 percent of the episodes have had some content related to disability or illness of a disabling sort, and this number rises to 76.4 percent if the count includes families that have been traumatised by the (usually recent) death of a family member in childhood or the prime of life by illness, accident or violence. Considering that the percentage of people living with disabilities in the U.S. is defined at 18.1 percent (Steinmetz), EMHE obviously favours them considerably in the selection process. Even the disproportionate numbers of people with disabilities living in poverty and who therefore might be more likely to need help—20.9 percent as opposed to 7.7 percent of the able-bodied population (Steinmetz)—does not fully explain their dominance on the program. In fact, the program seeks out people with new and different physical disabilities and illnesses, sending out emails to local news stations looking for “Extraordinary Mom / Dad recently diagnosed with ALS,” “Family who has a child with PROGERIA (aka ‘little old man’s disease’)” and other particular situations (Simonian). A total of sixty-five ill or disabled people have been featured on the show over the past four years, and, even if one considers its methods maudlin or exploitive, the presence of that much disability and illness is very unusual for reality TV and for TV in general. What the show purports to do is to radically transform multiple aspects of individuals’ lives—and especially lives marred by what are perceived as physical setbacks—via the provision of a luxurious new house, albeit sometimes with the addition of automobiles, mortgage payments or college scholarships. In some ways the assumptions underpinning EMHE fit with a social constructionist body theory that posits an almost infinitely flexible physical matter, of which the definitions and capabilities are largely determined by social concepts and institutions. The social model within the disability studies field has used this theoretical perspective to emphasise the distinction between an impairment, “the physical fact of lacking an arm or a leg,” and disability, “the social process that turns an impairment into a negative by creating barriers to access” (Davis, Bending 12). Accessible housing has certainly been one emphasis of disability rights activists, and many of them have focused on how “design conceptions, in relation to floor plans and allocation of functions to specific spaces, do not conceive of impairment, disease and illness as part of domestic habitation or being” (Imrie 91). In this regard, EMHE appears as a paragon. In one of its most challenging and dramatic Season 1 episodes, the “Design Team” worked on the home of the Ziteks, whose twenty-two-year-old son had been restricted to a sub-floor of the three-level structure since a car accident had paralyzed him. The show refitted the house with an elevator, roll-in bathroom and shower, and wheelchair-accessible doors. Robert Zitek was also provided with sophisticated computer equipment that would help him produce music, a life-long interest that had been halted by his upper-vertebra paralysis. Such examples abound in the new EMHE houses, which have been constructed for families featuring situations such as both blind and deaf members, a child prone to bone breaks due to osteogenesis imperfecta, legs lost in Iraq warfare, allergies that make mold life-threatening, sun sensitivity due to melanoma or polymorphic light eruption or migraines, fragile immune systems (often due to organ transplants or chemotherapy), cerebral palsy, multiple sclerosis, Krabbe disease and autism. EMHE tries to set these lives right via the latest in technology and treatment—computer communication software and hardware, lock systems, wheelchair-friendly design, ventilation and air purification set-ups, the latest in care and mental health approaches for various disabilities and occasional consultations with disabled celebrities like Marlee Matlin. Even when individuals or familes are “[d]iscriminated against on a daily basis by ignorance and physical challenges,” as the program website notes, they “deserve to have a home that doesn’t discriminate against them” (EMHE website, Season 3, Episode 4). The relief that they will be able to inhabit accessible and pleasant environments is evident on the faces of many of these recipients. That physical ease, that ability to move and perform the intimate acts of domestic life, seems according to the show’s narrative to be the most basic element of home. Nonetheless, as Robert Imrie has pointed out, superficial accessibility may still veil “a static, singular conception of the body” (201) that prevents broader change in attitudes about people with disabilities, their activities and their spaces. Starting with the story of the child singing in an attempt at self-comforting from Deleuze and Guattari’s A Thousand Plateaus, J. MacGregor Wise defines home as a process of territorialisation through specific behaviours. “The markers of home … are not simply inanimate objects (a place with stuff),” he notes, “but the presence, habits, and effects of spouses, children, parents, and companions” (299). While Ty Pennington, EMHE’s boisterous host, implies changes for these families along the lines of access to higher education, creative possibilities provided by musical instruments and disability-appropriate art materials, help with home businesses in the way of equipment and licenses and so on, the families’ identity-producing habits are just as likely to be significantly changed by the structural and decorative arrangements made for them by the Design Team. The homes that are created for these families are highly conventional in their structure, layout, decoration, and expectations of use. More specifically, certain behavioural patterns are encouraged and others discouraged by the Design Team’s assumptions. Several themes run through the show’s episodes: Large dining rooms provide for the most common of Pennington’s comments: “You can finally sit down and eat meals together as a family.” A nostalgic value in an era where most families have schedules full of conflicts that prevent such Ozzie-and-Harriet scenarios, it nonetheless predominates. Large kitchens allow for cooking and eating at home, though featured food is usually frozen and instant. In addition, kitchens are not designed for the families’ disabled members; for wheelchair users, for instance, counters need to be lower than usual with open space underneath, so that a wheelchair can roll underneath the counter. Thus, all the wheelchair inhabitants depicted will still be dependent on family members, primarily mothers, to prepare food and clean up after them. (See Imrie, 95-96, for examples of adapted kitchens.) Pets, perhaps because they are inherently “dirty,” are downplayed or absent, even when the family has them when EMHE arrives (except one family that is featured for their animal rescue efforts); interestingly, there are no service dogs, which might obviate the need for some of the high-tech solutions for the disabled offered by the show. The previous example is one element of an emphasis on clutter-free cleanliness and tastefulness combined with a rampant consumerism. While “cultural” elements may be salvaged from exotic immigrant families, most of the houses are very similar and assume a certain kind of commodified style based on new furniture (not humble family hand-me-downs), appliances, toys and expensive, prefab yard gear. Sears is a sponsor of the program, and shopping trips for furniture and appliances form a regular part of the program. Most or all of the houses have large garages, and the families are often given large vehicles by Ford, maintaining a positive take on a reliance on private transportation and gas-guzzling vehicles, but rarely handicap-adapted vans. Living spaces are open, with high ceilings and arches rather than doorways, so that family members will have visual and aural contact. Bedrooms are by contrast presented as private domains of retreat, especially for parents who have demanding (often ill or disabled) children, from which they are considered to need an occasional break. All living and bedrooms are dominated by TVs and other electronica, sometimes presented as an aid to the disabled, but also dominating to the point of excluding other ways of being and interacting. As already mentioned, childless couples and elderly people without children are completely absent. Friends buying houses together and gay couples are also not represented. The ideal of the heterosexual nuclear family is thus perpetuated, even though some of the show’s craftspeople are gay. Likewise, even though “independence” is mentioned frequently in the context of families with disabled members, there are no recipients who are disabled adults living on their own without family caretakers. “Independence” is spoken of mostly in terms of bathing, dressing, using the bathroom and other bodily aspects of life, not in terms of work, friendship, community or self-concept. Perhaps most salient, the EMHE houses are usually created as though nothing about the family will ever again change. While a few of the projects have featured terminally ill parents seeking to leave their children secure after their death, for the most part the families are considered oddly in stasis. Single mothers will stay single mothers, even children with conditions with severe prognoses will continue to live, the five-year-old will sleep forever in a fire-truck bed or dollhouse room, the occasional grandparent installed in his or her own suite will never pass away, and teenagers and young adults (especially the disabled) will never grow up, marry, discover their homosexuality, have a falling out with their parents or leave home. A kind of timeless nostalgia, hearkening back to Gaston Bachelard’s The Poetics of Space, pervades the show. Like the body-modifying Extreme Makeover, the Home Edition version is haunted by the issue of normalisation. The word ‘normal’, in fact, floats through the program’s dialogue frequently, and it is made clear that the goal of the show is to restore, as much as possible, a somewhat glamourised, but status quo existence. The website, in describing the work of one deserving couple notes that “Camp Barnabas is a non-profit organisation that caters to the needs of critically and chronically ill children and gives them the opportunity to be ‘normal’ for one week” (EMHE website, Season 3, Episode 7). Someone at the network is sophisticated enough to put ‘normal’ in quotation marks, and the show demonstrates a relatively inclusive concept of ‘normal’, but the word dominates the show itself, and the concept remains largely unquestioned (See Canguilhem; Davis, Enforcing Normalcy; and Snyder and Mitchell, Narrative, for critiques of the process of normalization in regard to disability). In EMHE there is no sense that disability or illness ever produces anything positive, even though the show also notes repeatedly the inspirational attitudes that people have developed through their disability and illness experiences. Similarly, there is no sense that a little messiness can be creatively productive or even necessary. Wise makes a distinction between “home and the home, home and house, home and domus,” the latter of each pair being normative concepts, whereas the former “is a space of comfort (a never-ending process)” antithetical to oppressive norms, such as the association of the home with the enforced domesticity of women. In cases where the house or domus becomes a place of violence and discomfort, home becomes the process of coping with or resisting the negative aspects of the place (300). Certainly the disabled have experienced this in inaccessible homes, but they may also come to experience a different version in a new EMHE house. For, as Wise puts it, “home can also mean a process of rationalization or submission, a break with the reality of the situation, self-delusion, or falling under the delusion of others” (300). The show’s assumption that the construction of these new houses will to a great extent solve these families’ problems (and that disability itself is the problem, not the failure of our culture to accommodate its many forms) may in fact be a delusional spell under which the recipient families fall. In fact, the show demonstrates a triumphalist narrative prevalent today, in which individual happenstance and extreme circumstances are given responsibility for social ills. In this regard, EMHE acts out an ancient morality play, where the recipients of the show’s largesse are assessed and judged based on what they “deserve,” and the opening of each show, when the Design Team reviews the application video tape of the family, strongly emphasises what good people these are (they work with charities, they love each other, they help out their neighbours) and how their situation is caused by natural disaster, act of God or undeserved tragedy, not their own bad behaviour. Disabilities are viewed as terrible tragedies that befall the young and innocent—there is no lung cancer or emphysema from a former smoking habit, and the recipients paralyzed by gunshots have received them in drive-by shootings or in the line of duty as police officers and soldiers. In addition, one of the functions of large families is that the children veil any selfish motivation the adults may have—they are always seeking the show’s assistance on behalf of the children, not themselves. While the Design Team always notes that there are “so many other deserving people out there,” the implication is that some people’s poverty and need may be their own fault. (See Snyder and Mitchell, Locations 41-67; Blunt and Dowling 116-25; and Holliday.) In addition, the structure of the show—with the opening view of the family’s undeserved problems, their joyous greeting at the arrival of the Team, their departure for the first vacation they may ever have had and then the final exuberance when they return to the new house—creates a sense of complete, almost religious salvation. Such narratives fail to point out social support systems that fail large numbers of people who live in poverty and who struggle with issues of accessibility in terms of not only domestic spaces, but public buildings, educational opportunities and social acceptance. In this way, it echoes elements of the medical model, long criticised in disability studies, where each and every disabled body is conceptualised as a site of individual aberration in need of correction, not as something disabled by an ableist society. In fact, “the house does not shelter us from cosmic forces; at most it filters and selects them” (Deleuze and Guattari, What Is Philosophy?, qtd. in Frichot 61), and those outside forces will still apply to all these families. The normative assumptions inherent in the houses may also become oppressive in spite of their being accessible in a technical sense (a thing necessary but perhaps not sufficient for a sense of home). As Tobin Siebers points out, “[t]he debate in architecture has so far focused more on the fundamental problem of whether buildings and landscapes should be universally accessible than on the aesthetic symbolism by which the built environment mirrors its potential inhabitants” (“Culture” 183). Siebers argues that the Jamesonian “political unconscious” is a “social imaginary” based on a concept of perfection (186) that “enforces a mutual identification between forms of appearance, whether organic, aesthetic, or architectural, and ideal images of the body politic” (185). Able-bodied people are fearful of the disabled’s incurability and refusal of normalisation, and do not accept the statistical fact that, at least through the process of aging, most people will end up dependent, ill and/or disabled at some point in life. Mainstream society “prefers to think of people with disabilities as a small population, a stable population, that nevertheless makes enormous claims on the resources of everyone else” (“Theory” 742). Siebers notes that the use of euphemism and strategies of covering eventually harm efforts to create a society that is home to able-bodied and disabled alike (“Theory” 747) and calls for an exploration of “new modes of beauty that attack aesthetic and political standards that insist on uniformity, balance, hygiene, and formal integrity” (Culture 210). What such an architecture, particularly of an actually livable domestic nature, might look like is an open question, though there are already some examples of people trying to reframe many of the assumptions about housing design. For instance, cohousing, where families and individuals share communal space, yet have private accommodations, too, makes available a larger social group than the nuclear family for social and caretaking activities (Blunt and Dowling, 262-65). But how does one define a beauty-less aesthetic or a pleasant home that is not hygienic? Post-structuralist architects, working on different grounds and usually in a highly theoretical, imaginary framework, however, may offer another clue, as they have also tried to ‘liberate’ architecture from the nostalgic dictates of the aesthetic. Ironically, one of the most famous of these, Peter Eisenman, is well known for producing, in a strange reversal, buildings that render the able-bodied uncomfortable and even sometimes ill (see, in particular, Frank and Eisenman). Of several house designs he produced over the years, Eisenman notes that his intention was to dislocate the house from that comforting metaphysic and symbolism of shelter in order to initiate a search for those possibilities of dwelling that may have been repressed by that metaphysic. The house may once have been a true locus and symbol of nurturing shelter, but in a world of irresolvable anxiety, the meaning and form of shelter must be different. (Eisenman 172) Although Eisenman’s starting point is very different from that of Siebers, it nonetheless resonates with the latter’s desire for an aesthetic that incorporates the “ragged edge” of disabled bodies. Yet few would want to live in a home made less attractive or less comfortable, and the “illusion” of permanence is one of the things that provide rest within our homes. Could there be an architecture, or an aesthetic, of home that could create a new and different kind of comfort and beauty, one that is neither based on a denial of the importance of bodily comfort and pleasure nor based on an oppressively narrow and commercialised set of aesthetic values that implicitly value some people over others? For one thing, instead of viewing home as a place of (false) stasis and permanence, we might see it as a place of continual change and renewal, which any home always becomes in practice anyway. As architect Hélène Frichot suggests, “we must look toward the immanent conditions of architecture, the processes it employs, the serial deformations of its built forms, together with our quotidian spatio-temporal practices” (63) instead of settling into a deadening nostalgia like that seen on EMHE. If we define home as a process of continual territorialisation, if we understand that “[t]here is no fixed self, only the process of looking for one,” and likewise that “there is no home, only the process of forming one” (Wise 303), perhaps we can begin to imagine a different, yet lovely conception of “house” and its relation to the experience of “home.” Extreme Makeover: Home Edition should be lauded for its attempts to include families of a wide variety of ethnic and racial backgrounds, various religions, from different regions around the U.S., both rural and suburban, even occasionally urban, and especially for its bringing to the fore how, indeed, structures can be as disabling as any individual impairment. That it shows designers and builders working with the families of the disabled to create accessible homes may help to change wider attitudes and break down resistance to the building of inclusive housing. However, it so far has missed the opportunity to help viewers think about the ways that our ideal homes may conflict with our constantly evolving social needs and bodily realities. References Bachelard, Gaston. The Poetics of Space. Tr. Maria Jolas. Boston: Beacon Press, 1969. Blunt, Alison, and Robyn Dowling. Home. London and New York: Routledge, 2006. Canguilhem, Georges. The Normal and the Pathological. New York: Zone Books, 1991. Davis, Lennard. Bending Over Backwards: Disability, Dismodernism & Other Difficult Positions. New York: NYUP, 2002. ———. Enforcing Normalcy: Disability, Deafness, and the Body. New York: Verso, 1995. Deleuze, Gilles, and Felix Guattari. A Thousand Plateaus: Capitalism and Schizophrenia. Tr. B. Massumi. Minneapolis: University of Minnesota Press, 1987. ———. What Is Philosophy? Tr. G. Burchell and H. Tomlinson. London and New York: Verso, 1994. Eisenman, Peter Eisenman. “Misreading” in House of Cards. New York: Oxford University Press, 1987. 21 Aug. 2007 http://prelectur.stanford.edu/lecturers/eisenman/biblio.html#cards>. Peter Eisenman Texts Anthology at the Stanford Presidential Lectures and Symposia in the Humanities and Arts site. 5 June 2007 http://prelectur.stanford.edu/lecturers/eisenman/texts.html#misread>. “Extreme Makeover: Home Edition” Website. 18 May 2007 http://abc.go.com/primetime/xtremehome/index.html>; http://abc.go.com/primetime/xtremehome/show.html>; http://abc.go.com/primetime/xtremehome/bios/101.html>; http://abc.go.com/primetime/xtremehome/bios/301.html>; and http://abc.go.com/primetime/xtremehome/bios/401.html>. Frank, Suzanne Sulof, and Peter Eisenman. House VI: The Client’s Response. New York: Watson-Guptill, 1994. Frichot, Hélène. “Stealing into Gilles Deleuze’s Baroque House.” In Deleuze and Space, eds. Ian Buchanan and Gregg Lambert. Deleuze Connections Series. Toronto: University of Toronto P, 2005. 61-79. Heyes, Cressida J. “Cosmetic Surgery and the Televisual Makeover: A Foucauldian feminist reading.” Feminist Media Studies 7.1 (2007): 17-32. Holliday, Ruth. “Home Truths?” In Ordinary Lifestyles: Popular Media, Consumption and Taste. Ed. David Bell and Joanne Hollows. Maidenhead, Berkshire, England: Open UP, 2005. 65-81. Imrie, Rob. Accessible Housing: Quality, Disability and Design. London and New York: Routledge, 2006. Paulsen, Wade. “‘Extreme Makeover: Home Edition’ surges in ratings and adds Ford as auto partner.” Reality TV World. 14 October 2004. 27 March 2005 http://www.realitytvworld.com/index/articles/story.php?s=2981>. Poniewozik, James, with Jeanne McDowell. “Charity Begins at Home: Extreme Makeover: Home Edition renovates its way into the Top 10 one heart-wrenching story at a time.” Time 20 Dec. 2004: i25 p159. Siebers, Tobin. “Disability in Theory: From Social Constructionism to the New Realism of the Body.” American Literary History 13.4 (2001): 737-754. ———. “What Can Disability Studies Learn from the Culture Wars?” Cultural Critique 55 (2003): 182-216. Simonian, Charisse. Email to network affiliates, 10 March 2006. 18 May 2007 http://www.thesmokinggun.com/archive/0327062extreme1.html>. Snyder, Sharon L., and David T. Mitchell. Cultural Locations of Disability. Chicago: U of Chicago P, 2006. ———. Narrative Prosthesis: Disability and the Dependencies of Discourse. Ann Arbor: University of Michigan Press, 2000. Steinmetz, Erika. Americans with Disabilities: 2002. U.S. Department of Commerce, Economics, and Statistics Administration, U.S. Census Bureau, 2006. 15 May 2007 http://www.census.gov/prod/2006pubs/p70-107.pdf>. Wilhelm, Ian. “The Rise of Charity TV (Reality Television Shows).” Chronicle of Philanthropy 19.8 (8 Feb. 2007): n.p. Wise, J. Macgregor. “Home: Territory and Identity.” Cultural Studies 14.2 (2000): 295-310. Citation reference for this article MLA Style Roney, Lisa. "The Extreme Connection Between Bodies and Houses." M/C Journal 10.4 (2007). echo date('d M. Y'); ?> <http://journal.media-culture.org.au/0708/03-roney.php>. APA Style Roney, L. (Aug. 2007) "The Extreme Connection Between Bodies and Houses," M/C Journal, 10(4). Retrieved echo date('d M. Y'); ?> from <http://journal.media-culture.org.au/0708/03-roney.php>.
APA, Harvard, Vancouver, ISO, and other styles
48

Steppat, Desiree, and Laia Castro Herrero. "Interaction (Election Campaigning Communication)." DOCA - Database of Variables for Content Analysis, April 18, 2021. http://dx.doi.org/10.34778/4f.

Full text
Abstract:
Interaction is described as a way to persuade citizens through direct contact allowing for a dialogical encounter between political actors and citizens (Magin, Podschuweit, Haßler, & Russmann, 2017). Although the new online environment can facilitate direct communication between politicians and citizens, empirical findings indicate that, to date, a unidirectional communication style between voters and politicians predominates (Jackson & Lilleker, 2010; Lilleker & Koc-Michalska, 2013; Stromer-Galley, 2000). To a large extent, politicians still employ the broadcasting style for campaign communication (Graham, Broersma, Hazelhoff, & van 't Haar, 2013) and retain communication strategies from the mass media era (Margolis & Resnick, 2000), as few voters visit their websites on a regular basis (Gibson & McAllister, 2011) or follow politicians' profiles on social media (Vaccari & Nielsen, 2013). However, research in campaign communication also shows that the Web 2.0 provide new opportunities for politicians to address an expanded, new electorate and engage them. As an example, studies show that posts that are frequently liked, commented, or shared can reach a much wider circle of users known as secondary audience or second-degree followers (Jacobs & Spierings, 2016; Vaccari & Valeriani, 2015). Interaction through social media channels furthermore enables face-to-face-like communication with individual voters, with whom politicians can also exchange ideas and negotiate campaign strategies (Magin et al., 2017). Field of application/theoretical foundation: In recent years, interaction has been recognized as a central aspect of dialogical communication in the field of public relations (Sweetser & Lariscy, 2008; Taylor & Kent, 2004). The theory states that symmetrical and dialogical two-way communication between an organization and its audience can sustainably support relationship building and their maintenance (Zhang & Seltzer, 2010). By applying this approach to the field of online political communication, it is possible to understand the interactions between politicians and citizens as a form of strategic communication and how they attract and persuade voters. References/combination with other methods of data collection Interaction in the last twenty years has been mostly studied in the context of the online environment either by looking at structural features of candidates’ online tools that enable interactions with users (e.g., Druckman, Kifer, & Parkin, 2007, 2009; Schweitzer, 2008); or by studying actual interactions between candidates and citizens on social media (e.g., Graham et al., 2013; Klinger, 2013). Both quantitative manual and automated content analyses thereof have been employed to in research on social media interactions). Quantitative content analysis have been also been combined and compared with qualitative interviews with campaign managers (e.g., Magin et al., 2017). Example studies Table 1: Overview exemplary studies measuring interaction, discussion, participation, and related constructs Study Medium Constructs Operationalization Coding Druckman et al. (2007); Druckman et al. (2009) Candidate websites Interactivity Web sites were scrutinized in light of their ability to create someform of interaction by e.g.enabling users to personalize information, arrange information, add information, and/or communicate with other voters and/or the candidate Additive index Schweitzer (2008) Candidate websites Interactivity provision strategies Possibility to comment on news; Agenda can be updated by visitors; A channel on video sharing websites; Possibility to comment (a video sharing website); Life webcam; Online photo gallery; Possibility to comment (online photo gallery); Easy contact; Online polls; Profile on SNS; Online forum or chat (among visitors); Online forum or chat (with politicians); Possibility to share content of the website; Possibility to share content on social media; Information about political program (interactive format) Additive index Magin et al. (2017) Facebook posts Interaction Index including (1) number of parties’ comments, (2) the number of users’ comments per 1,000,000 eligible voters, and (3) the share of posts in which the parties encourage the voters to discuss politics on the parties’ Facebook page (reciprocity). Combined index Graham et al. (2013), Graham, Jackson, & Broersma (2016) Twitter posts Interaction Tweets including: Debating/position taking; Acknowledging; Organizing/mobilizing; Advice giving/helping; and/or Consulting Furthermore @Tweets were scrutinized with whom politicians interacted: Public; Politician/candidate; journalist/media; Party activist; Lobbyist; Expert; Celebrity; Industry; and/or Authority (0) Not present (1) Present Lukamto & Carson (2016) Twitter comments, @mentions, and retweets (RTs) Discussion Measures quantity of one-way and two-way messages between members of parliament (MPs) and citizens and who they interact with: ‘citizen to politician’; ‘politician to citizen’; or ‘politician to politician’ Count variable Bene (2017) Facebook posts Engagement Engagement content is coded if the post contains either requests for likes, comments, and/or sharing or whether it poses a question. All of these individual elements were also coded on their own and analyzed in specified models with all dependent variables (0) Not present (1) Present Klinger (2013) Facebook & Twitter posts Participation Posts including calls for discussion, appeals to collect signatures and mobilize other people to participate and to vote as well as general community-building (0) Not present (1) Present Keller & Kleinen-von Königslöw (2018) Facebook & Twitter posts Pseudo discursive style (0) Not present (1) Present Graham et al. (2013), Graham et al. (2016) Twitter posts Interaction Tweets including: Debating/position taking; Acknowledging; Organizing/mobilizing; Advice giving/helping; and/or Consulting @Tweets were also scrutinized with whom politicians interacted: Public; Politician/candidate; journalist/media; Party activist; Lobbyist; Expert; Celebrity; Industry; and/or Authority (0) Not present (1) Present References Bene, M. (2017). Go Viral on the Facebook! Interactions between Candidates and Followers on Facebook during the Hungarian General Election Campaign of 2014. Information, Communication & Society, 20(4), 513–529. https://doi.org/10.1080/1369118X.2016.1198411 Druckman, J. N., Kifer, M. J., & Parkin, M. (2007). The Technological Development of Congressional Candidate Web Sites. Social Science Computer Review, 25(4), 425–442. https://doi.org/10.1177/0894439307305623 Druckman, J. N., Kifer, M. J., & Parkin, M. (2009). Campaign Communications in U.S. Congressional Elections. American Political Science Review, 103(3), 343–366. https://doi.org/10.1017/S0003055409990037 Gibson, R. K., & McAllister, I. (2011). Do online election campaigns win votes? The 2007 Australian “YouTube” election. Political Communication, 28(2), 227–244. Graham, T., Broersma, M., Hazelhoff, K., & van 't Haar, G. (2013). Between Broadcasting Political Messages and Interacting with Voters. Information, Communication & Society, 16(5), 692–716. https://doi.org/10.1080/1369118X.2013.785581 Graham, T., Jackson, D., & Broersma, M. (2016). New Platform, Old Habits? Candidates’ Use of Twitter during the 2010 British and Dutch General Election Campaigns. New Media & Society, 18(5), 765–783. https://doi.org/10.1177/1461444814546728 Jackson, N., & Lilleker, D. G. (2010). Tentative Steps towards Interaction. Internet Research, 20(5), 527–544. https://doi.org/10.1108/10662241011084103 Jacobs, K., & Spierings, N. (2016). Social Media, Parties, and Political Inequalities. New York: Palgrave Macmillan US. https://doi.org/10.1057/9781137533906 Keller, T. R., & Kleinen-von Königslöw, K. (2018). Pseudo-Discursive, Mobilizing, Emotional, and Entertaining: Identifying Four Successful Communication Styles of Political Actors on Social Media during the 2015 Swiss National Elections. Journal of Information Technology & Politics, 15(4), 358–377. https://doi.org/10.1080/19331681.2018.1510355 Klinger, U. (2013). Mastering the Art of Social Media. Information, Communication & Society, 16(5), 717–736. https://doi.org/10.1080/1369118X.2013.782329 Lilleker, D. G., & Koc-Michalska, K. (2013). Online Political Communication Strategies: MEPs, E-Representation, and Self-Representation. Journal of Information Technology & Politics, 10(2), 190–207. https://doi.org/10.1080/19331681.2012.758071 Lukamto, W., & Carson, A. (2016). Politweets: Social Media as a Platform for Political Engagement between Victorian Politicians and Citizens. Communication Research and Practice, 2(2), 191–212. https://doi.org/10.1080/22041451.2016.1186485 Magin, M., Podschuweit, N., Haßler, J., & Russmann, U. (2017). Campaigning in the Fourth Age of Political Communication. A Multi-Method Study on the Use of Facebook by German and Austrian Parties in the 2013 National Election Campaigns. Information, Communication & Society, 20(11), 1698–1719. https://doi.org/10.1080/1369118X.2016.1254269 Margolis, M., & Resnick, D. (2000). Politics as Usual: The Cyberspace "Revolution". Contemporary American politics. Thousand Oaks: Sage. Schweitzer, E. J. (2008). Innovation or Normalization in E-Campaigning? European Journal of Communication, 23(4), 449–470. https://doi.org/10.1177/0267323108096994 Stromer-Galley, J. (2000). On-line Interaction and Why Candidates Avoid It. Journal of Communication, 50(4), 111–132. Sweetser, K. D., & Lariscy, R. W. (2008). Candidates make good friends: An analysis of candidates' uses of Facebook. International Journal of Strategic Communication, 2(3), 175–198. Taylor, M., & Kent, M. L. (2004). Congressional web sites and their potential for public dialogue. Atlantic Journal of Communication, 12(2), 59–76. Vaccari, C., & Nielsen, R. K. (2013). What drives politicians' online popularity? An analysis of the 2010 US midterm elections. Journal of Information Technology & Politics, 10(2), 208–222. Vaccari, C., & Valeriani, A. (2015). Follow the leader! Direct and indirect flows of political communication during the 2013 Italian general election campaign. New Media & Society, 17(7), 1025–1042. https://doi.org/10.1177/1461444813511038 Zhang, W., & Seltzer, T. (2010). Another piece of the puzzle: Advancing social capital theory by examining the effect of political party relationship quality on political and civic participation. International Journal of Strategic Communication, 4(3), 155–170.
APA, Harvard, Vancouver, ISO, and other styles
49

Kincheloe, Pamela. "Do Androids Dream of Electric Speech? The Construction of Cochlear Implant Identity on American Television and the “New Deaf Cyborg”." M/C Journal 13, no. 3 (June 30, 2010). http://dx.doi.org/10.5204/mcj.254.

Full text
Abstract:
Cyborgs already walk among us. (“Cures to Come” 76) This essay was begun as a reaction to a Hallmark Hall of Fame television movie called Sweet Nothing in My Ear (2008), which follows the lives of two parents, Dan, who is hearing (played by Jeff Daniels), and Laura, who is deaf (Marlee Matlin), as they struggle to make a decision about whether or not to give their 11-year-old son, Adam (late-deafened), a cochlear implant. Dan and Laura represent different perspectives, hearing and deaf perspectives. The film dramatizes the parents’ conflict and negotiation, exposing audiences to both sides of the cochlear implant debate, albeit in a fairly simplistic way. Nevertheless, it represents the lives of deaf people and gives voice to debates about cochlear implants with more accuracy and detail than most film and television dramas. One of the central scenes in the film is what I call the “activation scene”, quite common to cochlear implant narratives. In the scene, the protagonists witness a child having his implant activated or turned on. The depiction is reminiscent of the WATER scene in the film about Helen Keller, The Miracle Worker, employing a sentimental visual rhetoric. First, the two parents are shown seated near the child, clasping their hands as if in prayer. The audiologist, wielder of technology and therefore clearly the authority figure in the scene, types away furiously on her laptop. At the moment of being “turned on,” the child suddenly “hears” his father calling “David! David!” He gazes angelically toward heaven as piano music plays plaintively in the background. The parents all but fall to their knees and the protagonist of the film, Dan, watching through a window, weeps. It is a scene of cure, of healing, of “miracle,” a hyper-sentimentalised portrait of what is in reality often a rather anti-climactic event. It was certainly anti-climactic in my son, Michael’s case. I was taken aback by how this scene was presented and dismayed overall at some of the inaccuracies, small though they were, in the portrayal of cochlear implants in this film. It was, after all, according to the Nielsen ratings, seen by 8 million people. I began to wonder what kinds of misconceptions my son was going to face when he met people whose only exposure to implants was through media representations. Spurred by this question, I started to research other recent portrayals of people with implants on U.S. television in the past ten years, to see how cochlear implant (hereafter referred to as CI) identity has been portrayed by American media. For most of American history, deaf people have been portrayed in print and visual media as exotic “others,” and have long been the subject of an almost morbid cultural fascination. Christopher Krentz suggests that, particularly in the nineteenth century, scenes pairing sentimentality and deafness repressed an innate, Kristevan “abject” revulsion towards deaf people. Those who are deaf highlight and define, through their ‘lack’, the “unmarked” body. The fact of their deafness, understood as lack, conjures up an ideal that it does not attain, the ideal of the so-called “normal” or “whole” body. In recent years, however, the figure of the “deaf as Other” in the media, has shifted from what might be termed the “traditionally” deaf character, to what Brenda Jo Brueggeman (in her recent book Deaf Subjects: Between Identities and Places), calls “the new deaf cyborg” or the deaf person with a cochlear implant (4). N. Katharine Hailes states that cyborgs are now “the stage on which are performed contestations about the body boundaries that have often marked class, ethnic, and cultural differences” (85). In this essay, I claim that the character with a CI, as portrayed in the media, is now not only a strange, “marked” “Other,” but is also a screen upon which viewers project anxieties about technology, demonstrating both fascination fear. In her book, Brueggeman issues a call to action, saying that Deaf Studies must now begin to examine what she calls “implanting rhetorics,” or “the rhetorical relationships between our technologies and our identity” and therefore needs to attend to the construction of “the new deaf cyborg” (18). This short study will serve, I hope, as both a response to that injunction and as a jumping-off point for more in-depth studies of the construction of the CI identity and the implications of these constructions. First, we should consider what a cochlear implant is and how it functions. The National Association of the Deaf in the United States defines the cochlear implant as a device used to help the user perceive sound, i.e., the sensation of sound that is transmitted past the damaged cochlea to the brain. In this strictly sensorineural manner, the implant works: the sensation of sound is delivered to the brain. The stated goal of the implant is for it to function as a tool to enable deaf children to develop language based on spoken communication. (“NAD Position”) The external portion of the implant consists of the following parts: a microphone, which picks up sound from the environment, which is contained in the behind-the-ear device that resembles the standard BTE hearing aid; in this “hearing aid” there is also a speech processor, which selects and arranges sounds picked up by the microphone. The processor transmits signals to the transmitter/receiver, which then converts them into electric impulses. Part of the transmitter sits on the skin and attaches to the inner portion of the transmitter by means of a magnet. The inner portion of the receiver/stimulator sends the impulses down into the electrode array that lies inside the cochlea, which in turn stimulates the auditory nerve, giving the brain the impression of sound (“Cochlear Implants”). According to manufacturer’s statistics, there are now approximately 188,000 people worldwide who have obtained cochlear implants, though the number of these that are in use is not known (Nussbaum). That is what a cochlear implant is. Before we can look at how people with implants are portrayed in the media, before we examine constructions of identity, perhaps we should first ask what constitutes a “real” CI identity? This is, of course, laughable; pinning down a homogeneous CI identity is no more likely than finding a blanket definition of “deaf identity.” For example, at this point in time, there isn’t even a word or term in American culture for someone with an implant. I struggle with how to phrase it in this essay - “implantee?” “recipient?” - there are no neat labels. In the USA you can call a person deaf, Deaf (the “D” representing a specific cultural and political identity), hearing impaired, hard of hearing, and each gradation implies, for better or worse, some kind of subject position. There are no such terms for a person who gets an implant. Are people with implants, as suggested above, just deaf? Deaf? Are they hard of hearing? There is even debate in the ASL community as to what sign should be used to indicate “someone who has a cochlear implant.” If a “CI identity” cannot be located, then perhaps the rhetoric that is used to describe it may be. Paddy Ladd, in Understanding Deaf Culture, does a brilliant job of exploring the various discourses that have surrounded deaf culture throughout history. Stuart Blume borrows heavily from Ladd in his “The Rhetoric and Counter-Rhetoric of a 'Bionic' Technology”, where he points out that an “essential and deliberate feature” of the history of the CI from the 60s onward, was that it was constructed in an overwhelmingly positive light by the mass media, using what Ladd calls the “medical” rhetorical model. That is, that the CI is a kind of medical miracle that promised to cure deafness. Within this model one may find also the sentimental, “missionary” rhetoric that Krentz discusses, what Ladd claims is a revival of the evangelism of the nineteenth-century Oralist movement in America. Indeed, newspaper articles in the 1980s and 90s hailed the implant as a “breakthrough”, a “miracle”; even a quick survey of headlines shows evidence of this: “Upton Boy Can Hear at Last!”, “Girl with a New Song in Her Heart”, “Children Head Queue for Bionic Ears” (Lane). As recently as January 2010, an issue of National Geographic featured on its cover the headline Merging Man and Machine: The Bionic Age. Sure enough, the second photograph in the story is of a child’s bilateral cochlear implant, with the caption “within months of the surgery (the child) spoke the words his hearing parents longed for: Mama and Dada.” “You’re looking at a real bionic kid,” says Johns Hopkins University surgeon John Niparko, proudly (37). To counter this medical/corporate rhetoric of cure, Ladd and Blume claim, the deaf community devised a counter-rhetoric, a discourse in which the CI is not cast in the language of miracle and life, but instead in terms of death, mutilation, and cultural oppression. Here, the implant is depicted as the last in a long line of sadistic experiments using the deaf as guinea pigs. Often the CI is framed in the language of Nazism and genocide as seen in the title of an article in the British Deaf News: “Cochlear Implants: Oralism’s Final Solution.” So, which of these two “implanting rhetorics” is most visible in the current construction of the CI in American television? Is the CI identity presented by rendering people with CIs impossibly positive, happy characters? Is it delineated using the metaphors of the sentimental, of cure, of miracle? Or is the CI identity constructed using the counter-rhetorical references to death, oppression and cultural genocide? One might hypothesize that television, like other media, cultivating as it does the values of the hearing hegemony, would err on the side of promulgating the medicalised, positivist rhetoric of the “cure” for deafness. In an effort to find out, I conducted a general survey of American television shows from 2000 to now that featured characters with CIs. I did not include news shows or documentaries in my survey. Interestingly, some of the earliest television portrayals of CIs appeared in that bastion of American sentimentality, the daytime soap opera. In 2006, on the show “The Young and the Restless”, a “troubled college student who contracted meningitis” received an implant, and in 2007 “All My Children” aired a story arc about a “toddler who becomes deaf after a car crash.” It is interesting to note that both characters were portrayed as “late-deafened”, or suddenly inflicted with the loss of a sense they previously possessed, thus avoiding any whiff of controversy about early implantation. But one expects a hyper-sentimentalised portrayal of just about everything in daytime dramas like this. What is interesting is that when people with CIs have appeared on several “reality” programs, which purport to offer “real,” unadulterated glimpses into people’s lives, the rhetoric is no less sentimentalized than the soaps (perhaps because these shows are no less fabricated). A good example of this is the widely watched and, I think, ironically named show “True Life” which appears on MTV. This is a series that claims to tell the “remarkable real-life stories of young people and the unusual subcultures they inhabit.” In episode 42, “ True Life: I’m Deaf”, part of the show follows a young man, Chris, born deaf and proud of it (his words), who decides to get a cochlear implant because he wants to be involved in the hearing world. Through an interpreter Chris explains that he wants an implant so he can communicate with his friends, talk with girls, and ultimately fulfill his dreams of having a job and getting married (one has to ask: are these things he can’t do without an implant?). The show’s promo asks “how do you go from living a life in total silence to fully understanding the spoken language?” This statement alone contains two elements common to the “miracle” rhetoric, first that the “tragic” deaf victim will emerge from a completely lonely, silent place (not true; most deaf people have some residual hearing, and if you watch the show you see Chris signing, “speaking” voluminously) to seamlessly, miraculously, “fully” joining and understanding the hearing world. Chris, it seems, will only come into full being when he is able to join the hearing world. In this case, the CI will cure what ails him. According to “True Life.” Aside from “soap opera” drama and so-called reality programming, by far the largest dissemination of media constructions of the CI in the past ten years occurred on top-slot prime-time television shows, which consist primarily of the immensely popular genre of the medical and police procedural drama. Most of these shows have at one time or another had a “deaf” episode, in which there is a deaf character or characters involved, but between 2005 and 2008, it is interesting to note that most, if not all of the most popular of these have aired episodes devoted to the CI controversy, or have featured deaf characters with CIs. The shows include: CSI (both Miami and New York), Cold Case, Law and Order (both SVU and Criminal Intent), Scrubs, Gideon’s Crossing, and Bones. Below is a snippet of dialogue from Bones: Zach: {Holding a necklace} He was wearing this.Angela: Catholic boy.Brennan: One by two forceps.Angela {as Brennan pulls a small disc out from behind the victim’s ear} What is that?Brennan: Cochlear implant. Looks like the birds were trying to get it.Angela: That would set a boy apart from the others, being deaf.(Bones, “A Boy in the Tree”, 1.3, 2005) In this scene, the forensics experts are able to describe significant points of this victim’s identity using the only two solid artifacts left in the remains, a crucifix and a cochlear implant. I cite this scene because it serves, I believe, as a neat metaphor for how these shows, and indeed television media in general, are, like the investigators, constantly engaged in the business of cobbling together identity: in this particular case, a cochlear implant identity. It also shows how an audience can cultivate or interpret these kinds of identity constructions, here, the implant as an object serves as a tangible sign of deafness, and from this sign, or clue, the “audience” (represented by the spectator, Angela) immediately infers that the victim was lonely and isolated, “set apart from the others.” Such wrongheaded inferences, frivolous as they may seem coming from the realm of popular culture, have, I believe, a profound influence on the perceptions of larger society. The use of the CI in Bones is quite interesting, because although at the beginning of the show the implant is a key piece of evidence, that which marks and identifies the dead/deaf body, the character’s CI identity proves almost completely irrelevant to the unfolding of the murder-mystery. The only times the CI character’s deafness is emphasized are when an effort is made to prove that the he committed suicide (i.e., if you’re deaf you are therefore “isolated,” and therefore you must be miserable enough to kill yourself). Zak, one of the forensics officers says, “I didn’t talk to anyone in high school and I didn’t kill myself” and another officer comments that the boy was “alienated by culture, by language, and by his handicap” (odd statements, since most deaf children with or without implants have remarkably good language ability). Also, in another strange moment, the victim’s ambassador/mother shows a video clip of the child’s CI activation and says “a person who lived through this miracle would never take his own life” (emphasis mine). A girlfriend, implicated in the murder (the boy is killed because he threatened to “talk”, revealing a blackmail scheme), says “people didn’t notice him because of the way he talked but I liked him…” So at least in this show, both types of “implanting rhetoric” are employed; a person with a CI, though the recipient of a “miracle,” is also perceived as “isolated” and “alienated” and unfortunately, ends up dead. This kind of rather negative portrayal of a person with a CI also appears in the CSI: New York episode ”Silent Night” which aired in 2006. One of two plot lines features Marlee Matlin as the mother of a deaf family. At the beginning of the episode, after feeling some strange vibrations, Matlin’s character, Gina, checks on her little granddaughter, Elizabeth, who is crying hysterically in her crib. She finds her daughter, Alison, dead on the floor. In the course of the show, it is found that a former boyfriend, Cole, who may have been the father of the infant, struggled with and shot Alison as he was trying to kidnap the baby. Apparently Cole “got his hearing back” with a cochlear implant, no longer considered himself Deaf, and wanted the child so that she wouldn’t be raised “Deaf.” At the end of the show, Cole tries to abduct both grandmother and baby at gunpoint. As he has lost his external transmitter, he is unable to understand what the police are trying to tell him and threatens to kill his hostages. He is arrested in the end. In this case, the CI recipient is depicted as a violent, out of control figure, calmed (in this case) only by Matlin’s presence and her ability to communicate with him in ASL. The implication is that in getting the CI, Cole is “killing off” his Deaf identity, and as a result, is mentally unstable. Talking to Matlin, whose character is a stand-in for Deaf culture, is the only way to bring him back to his senses. The October 2007 episode of CSI: Miami entitled “Inside-Out” is another example of the counter-rhetoric at work in the form of another implant corpse. A police officer, trying to prevent the escape of a criminal en route to prison, thinks he has accidentally shot an innocent bystander, a deaf woman. An exchange between the coroner and a CSI goes as follows: (Alexx Woods): “This is as innocent as a victim gets.”(Calleigh Duquesne): “How so?”AW: Check this out.”CD: “I don’t understand. Her head is magnetized? Steel plate?”AW: “It’s a cochlear implant. Helps deaf people to receive and process speech and sounds.”(CSI dramatization) AW VO: “It’s surgically implanted into the inner ear. Consists of a receiver that decodes and transmits to an electrode array sending a signal to the brain.”CD: “Wouldn’t there be an external component?”AW: “Oh, she must have lost it before she was shot.”CD: “Well, that explains why she didn’t get out of there. She had no idea what was going on.” (TWIZ) Based on the evidence, the “sign” of the implant, the investigators are able to identify the victim as deaf, and they infer therefore that she is innocent. It is only at the end of the program that we learn that the deaf “innocent” was really the girlfriend of the criminal, and was on the scene aiding in his escape. So she is at first “as innocent” as they come, and then at the end, she is the most insidious of the criminals in the episode. The writers at least provide a nice twist on the more common deaf-innocent stereotype. Cold Case showcased a CI in the 2008 episode “Andy in C Minor,” in which the case of a 17-year-old deaf boy is reopened. The boy, Andy, had disappeared from his high school. In the investigation it is revealed that his hearing girlfriend, Emma, convinced him to get an implant, because it would help him play the piano, which he wanted to do in order to bond with her. His parents, deaf, were against the idea, and had him promise to break up with Emma and never bring up the CI again. His body is found on the campus, with a cochlear device next to his remains. Apparently Emma had convinced him to get the implant and, in the end, Andy’s father had reluctantly consented to the surgery. It is finally revealed that his Deaf best friend, Carlos, killed him with a blow to the back of the head while he was playing the piano, because he was “afraid to be alone.” This show uses the counter-rhetoric of Deaf genocide in an interesting way. In this case it is not just the CI device alone that renders the CI character symbolically “dead” to his Deaf identity, but it leads directly to his being literally executed by, or in a sense, excommunicated from, Deaf Culture, as it is represented by the character of Carlos. The “House Divided” episode of House (2009) provides the most problematic (or I should say absurd) representation of the CI process and of a CI identity. In the show, a fourteen-year-old deaf wrestler comes into the hospital after experiencing terrible head pain and hearing “imaginary explosions.” Doctors Foreman and Thirteen dutifully serve as representatives of both sides of the “implant debate”: when discussing why House hasn’t mocked the patient for not having a CI, Thirteen says “The patient doesn’t have a CI because he’s comfortable with who he is. That’s admirable.” Foreman says, “He’s deaf. It’s not an identity, it’s a disability.” 13: “It’s also a culture.” F: “Anything I can simulate with $3 earplugs isn’t a culture.” Later, House, talking to himself, thinks “he’s going to go through life deaf. He has no idea what he’s missing.” So, as usual, without permission, he orders Chase to implant a CI in the patient while he is under anesthesia for another procedure (a brain biopsy). After the surgery the team asks House why he did it and he responds, “Why would I give someone their hearing? Ask God the same question you’d get the same answer.” The shows writers endow House’s character, as they usually do, with the stereotypical “God complex” of the medical establishment, but in doing also they play beautifully into the Ladd and Blume’s rhetoric of medical miracle and cure. Immediately after the implant (which the hospital just happened to have on hand) the incision has, miraculously, healed overnight. Chase (who just happens to be a skilled CI surgeon and audiologist) activates the external processor (normally a months-long process). The sound is overwhelming, the boy hears everything. The mother is upset. “Once my son is stable,” the mom says, “I want that THING out of his head.” The patient also demands that the “thing” be removed. Right after this scene, House puts a Bluetooth in his ear so he can talk to himself without people thinking he’s crazy (an interesting reference to how we all are becoming cyborgs, more and more “implanted” with technology). Later, mother and son have the usual touching sentimental scene, where she speaks his name, he hears her voice for the first time and says, “Is that my name? S-E-T-H?” Mom cries. Seth’s deaf girlfriend later tells him she wishes she could get a CI, “It’s a great thing. It will open up a whole new world for you,” an idea he rejects. He hears his girlfriend vocalize, and asks Thirteen if he “sounds like that.” This for some reason clinches his decision about not wanting his CI and, rather than simply take off the external magnet, he rips the entire device right out of his head, which sends him into shock and system failure. Ultimately the team solves the mystery of the boy’s initial ailment and diagnoses him with sarcoidosis. In a final scene, the mother tells her son that she is having them replace the implant. She says it’s “my call.” This show, with its confusing use of both the sentimental and the counter-rhetoric, as well as its outrageous inaccuracies, is the most egregious example of how the CI is currently being constructed on television, but it, along with my other examples, clearly shows the Ladd/Blume rhetoric and counter rhetoric at work. The CI character is on one hand portrayed as an innocent, infantilized, tragic, or passive figure that is the recipient of a medical miracle kindly urged upon them (or forced upon them, as in the case of House). On the other hand, the CI character is depicted in the language of the counter-rhetoric: as deeply flawed, crazed, disturbed or damaged somehow by the incursions onto their Deaf identity, or, in the worst case scenario, they are dead, exterminated. Granted, it is the very premise of the forensic/crime drama to have a victim, and a dead victim, and it is the nature of the police drama to have a “bad,” criminal character; there is nothing wrong with having both good and bad CI characters, but my question is, in the end, why is it an either-or proposition? Why is CI identity only being portrayed in essentialist terms on these types of shows? Why are there no realistic portrayals of people with CIs (and for that matter, deaf people) as the richly varied individuals that they are? These questions aside, if these two types of “implanting rhetoric”, the sentimentalised and the terminated, are all we have at the moment, what does it mean? As I mentioned early in this essay, deaf people, along with many “others,” have long helped to highlight and define the hegemonic “norm.” The apparent cultural need for a Foucauldian “marked body” explains not only the popularity of crime dramas, but it also could explain the oddly proliferant use of characters with cochlear implants in these particular shows. A person with an implant on the side of their head is definitely a more “marked” body than the deaf person with no hearing aid. The CI character is more controversial, more shocking; it’s trendier, “sexier”, and this boosts ratings. But CI characters are, unlike their deaf predecessors, now serving an additional cultural function. I believe they are, as I claim in the beginning of this essay, screens upon which our culture is now projecting repressed anxieties about emergent technology. The two essentialist rhetorics of the cochlear implant, the rhetoric of the sentimental, medical model, and the rhetoric of genocide, ultimately represent our technophilia and our technophobia. The CI character embodies what Debra Shaw terms a current, “ontological insecurity that attends the interface between the human body and the datasphere” (85). We are growing more nervous “as new technologies shape our experiences, they blur the lines between the corporeal and incorporeal, between physical space and virtual space” (Selfe). Technology either threatens the integrity of the self, “the coherence of the body” (we are either dead or damaged) or technology allows us to transcend the limitations of the body: we are converted, “transformed”, the recipient of a happy modern miracle. In the end, I found that representations of CI on television (in the United States) are overwhelmingly sentimental and therefore essentialist. It seems that the conflicting nineteenth century tendency of attraction and revulsion toward the deaf is still, in the twenty-first century, evident. We are still mired in the rhetoric of “cure” and “control,” despite an active Deaf counter discourse that employs the language of the holocaust, warning of the extermination of yet another cultural minority. We are also daily becoming daily more “embedded in cybernetic systems,” with our laptops, emails, GPSs, PDAs, cell phones, Bluetooths, and the likes. We are becoming increasingly engaged in a “necessary relationship with machines” (Shaw 91). We are gradually becoming no longer “other” to the machine, and so our culturally constructed perceptions of ourselves are being threatened. In the nineteenth century, divisions and hierarchies between a white male majority and the “other” (women, African Americans, immigrants, Native Americans) began to blur. Now, the divisions between human and machine, as represented by a person with a CI, are starting to blur, creating anxiety. Perhaps this anxiety is why we are trying, at least in the media, symbolically to ‘cure’ the marked body or kill off the cyborg. Future examinations of the discourse should, I believe, use these media constructions as a lens through which to continue to examine and illuminate the complex subject position of the CI identity, and therefore, perhaps, also explore what the subject position of the post/human identity will be. References "A Boy in a Tree." Patrick Norris (dir.), Hart Hanson (by), Emily Deschanel (perf.). Bones, Fox Network, 7 Sep. 2005. “Andy in C Minor.” Jeannete Szwarc (dir.), Gavin Harris (by), Kathryn Morris (perf.). Cold Case, CBS Network, 30 March 2008. Blume, Stuart. “The Rhetoric and Counter Rhetoric of a “Bionic” Technology.” Science, Technology and Human Values 22.1 (1997): 31-56. Brueggemann, Brenda Jo. Deaf Subjects: Between Identities and Places. New York: New York UP, 2009. “Cochlear Implant Statistics.” ASL-Cochlear Implant Community. Blog. Citing Laurent Le Clerc National Deaf Education Center. Gallaudet University, 18 Mar. 2008. 29 Apr. 2010 ‹http:/ /aslci.blogspot.com/2008/03/cochlear-implant-statistics.html›. “Cures to Come.” Discover Presents the Brain (Spring 2010): 76. Fischman, Josh. “Bionics.” National Geographic Magazine 217 (2010). “House Divided.” Greg Yaitanes (dir.), Matthew V. Lewis (by), Hugh Laurie (perf.). House, Fox Network, 22 Apr. 2009. “Inside-Out.” Gina Lamar (dir.), Anthony Zuiker (by), David Caruso (perf.). CSI: Miami, CBS Network, 8 Oct. 2007. Krentz, Christopher. Writing Deafness: The Hearing Line in Nineteenth-Century American Literature. Chapel Hill: UNC P, 2007. Ladd, Paddy. Understanding Deaf Culture: In Search of Deafhood. Clevedon, UK: Multilingual Matters Limited, 2002. Lane, Harlan. A Journey Into the Deaf-World. San Diego: DawnSignPress, 1996. “NAD Position Statement on the Cochlear Implant.” National Association of the Deaf. 6 Oct. 2000. 29 April 2010 ‹http://www.nad.org/issues/technology/assistive-listening/cochlear-implants›. Nussbaum, Debra. “Manufacturer Information.” Cochlear Implant Information Center. National Deaf Education Center. Gallaudet University. 29 Apr. 2010 < http://clerccenter.gallaudet.edu >. Shaw, Debra. Technoculture: The Key Concepts. Oxford: Berg, 2008. “Silent Night.” Rob Bailey (dir.), Anthony Zuiker (by), Gary Sinise (perf.). CSI: New York, CBS Network, 13 Dec. 2006. “Sweet Nothing in My Ear.” Joseph Sargent (dir.), Stephen Sachs (by), Jeff Daniels (perf.). Hallmark Hall of Fame Production, 20 Apr. 2008. TWIZ TV scripts. CSI: Miami, “Inside-Out.” “What Is the Surgery Like?” FAQ, University of Miami Cochlear Implant Center. 29 Apr. 2010 ‹http://cochlearimplants.med.miami.edu/faq/index.asp›.
APA, Harvard, Vancouver, ISO, and other styles
50

Diehl, Heath. "Performing (in) the Grave." M/C Journal 4, no. 3 (June 1, 2001). http://dx.doi.org/10.5204/mcj.1910.

Full text
Abstract:
The following essay constitutes a theoretical journey through the landscape of the NAMES Project AIDS Quilt, one narrated from the perspective of those who live on to mourn, to remember. To some critics, my approach might at once appear radical or unorthodox since I focus on how Quilt spectators engage with the artifact and are thereby implicated in the history of the epidemic, rather than on how the dead are made to speak from beyond the grave. My intent is not to invalidate the claims made or the conclusions reached by other critics who have written persuasively about how the Quilt facilitates a voice (both individual and collective) for those who have died of AIDS-related illnesses; indeed, such critics have contributed a wealth of significant knowledge to critical understandings of the pedagogical and political functions of the Quilt. My intent, rather, is to respond to a set of as yet unexplored questions about how the ever-evolving landscape of the AIDS epidemic has altered the nature and purpose of Quilt spectatorship. When the Quilt was created in 1985, “naming names” was an important strategy for political survival, especially given the institutional apathy that silenced and marginalized all who were infected and/or affected by the epidemic. However, over the past sixteen years, apathy has slowly given way to increased attention by medical and media institutions. No longer is memory and reverence enough. Now, we must ask ourselves how the Quilt can continue to be used to combat the emergent obstacles that have sprung up in the wake of apathy and silence. This is not to suggest that remembrance, mourning, and reverence are not still significant responses to the epidemic; we cannot forgot the past, lest we repeat it. But it is to suggest that as we look back, we also must move forward and continue to chart new horizons for how our minds and bodies engage with the Quilt as a social and political space. Throughout this essay, then, my conclusions are at best tentative, offered more as a gesture of hope than as a model for survival. It is my hope that critics can continue to press against social spaces both with caution and determination because those actions matter. We must act with caution because there can be devastating consequences of asserting claims to visibility and location. We must act with determination because there are equally perilous consequences of not doing so. Since its meager beginnings, the NAMES Project AIDS Quilt has undergone exponential changes in size, shape, and scope, but critical responses to the Quilt have remained stagnant with most critics attributing to the Quilt a single meaning and purpose: to revere the dead. Cultural critic Peter S. Hawkins, for instance, argues that "the Quilt . . . is most profoundly about the naming of names" (760), while journalist Jerry Gentry suggests that the Quilt bespeaks "a national and international constructive expression of grief" (550), a grief which most powerfully resonates in the loss of individual lives. While "naming names" is a politically important function of the Quilt, critics who read the artifact as only motivated by memory assume that exhibitions of the artifact facilitate a static model of performance. For such critics, the Quilt represents a mass graveyard--both as a place of interment and as a place in which ideological meanings are circumscribed by the fixity and stillness of reverence. (This reading is partly enabled by the fact that each panel measures the size of a human grave.) Not only does this reading universalize the meaning of the Quilt but also it establishes a monolithic viewing position from which to receive that meaning. Here, I outline an alternative model of reception which is implicit in the design and display of the Quilt. While this model acknowledges reverence as one potential response to the Quilt, it does not foreclose other ways of reading. Rather than facilitating a grave performance, then, the Quilt enables performances within the grave. These performances are constituted in/through a dynamic exchange between speaker and listener, text and context, and work to produce a range of ideological meanings and subject positions. To understand how the Quilt locates its viewers within a particular subject position, it is first necessary to specify the speaker-listener relationship established in displays of the Quilt. This relationship is played out through a series of confessional utterances which, as Michel Foucault explains in The History of Sexuality, Volume 1, imply a dialectic relationship between speaker and listener in which subjectivity is predicated on subjection (61-62). The speaker's desire to confess necessitates the presence of a listener, one not wholly passive since his/her presence incites and enables the will to confess. In this way, both speaker and listener are marked as active/passive agents in an exchange characterized by reciprocity and negotiation. Because speakers and listeners simultaneously serve as subject and object of the confession, the exchange cannot be represented as static (active/passive) or unidirectional (sender-message-receiver). Since many critics already have carefully delineated the processes through which the Quilt directs the address of the panels and constitutes the dead as subjects, here I want to focus on how spectators are constructed as subjects who bear witness. Critics typically posit viewers of the Quilt as unified, coherent, monolithic subjects; yet Foucault's discussion of the confessional exchange assumes a subject-in-process. For me, this process is most accurately characterized as schizophrenic. My use of schizophrenia is tropic rather than diagnostic, in that the term works figuratively to describe subject formation rather than to identify the nature of psychiatric disturbance. Two characteristics (which are derived from the symptomatology of the psychic disorder schizophrenia) define the schizophrenic spectator: one, the loss of "normal" associations; and two, the presence of "auditory hallucinations." The first characteristic of schizophrenic spectators is the loss of "normal" associations. Remi J. Cadoret notes that in schizophrenics, "[t]hought processes appear to lose their normal associations, or usual connecting links, so that the individual is often unable to focus his [sic] thinking upon a particular mental task" (481). For schizophrenics, conventional relational markers (such as chronology, causality, temporality, and spatiality) no longer order cognition; instead, these markers are distorted (if not entirely ineffectual), creating for the schizophrenic a fractured sense of self in/and world. Without these normal associations, the schizophrenic wanders aimlessly (and often in isolation) through a chaotic world in search of structure, meaning, and purpose. Temporal associations provide perhaps the most common means of ordering experience. Viewed as a linear progression characterized by movement, change, and renewal, time structures the historical and the everyday by sequencing, demarcating, and hierarchizing events. Within the Quilt, this sense of progression is supplanted by perpetual repetition of the present. Elsley has offered a similar observation, noting that the Quilt operates in a "transitory present" tense, it "exists in a continual state of becoming" (194). In one sense, this perpetual present tense derives from the fact that no two displays of the Quilt are identical. Panels are ordered differently, new names and panels are added, older panels begin to show signs of wear-and-tear. A perpetual present tense also derives from the fact that the Quilt charts the progression of an epidemic that is itself ongoing, incomplete. Thus, the landscape of the Quilt is re-mapped in light of advances in HIV-treatment, softening/tightening of social mores, and changes in AIDS demographics. Another common means of ordering experience is though spatial associations. Location orders the social through architecture, urban planning, and zoning, endowing spaces with a well-defined purpose and layout. Yet the Quilt provides few signals regarding how spectators are intended to navigate its surface. As Weinberg notes, the Quilt is a "great grid" with "no narrative, no start or finish" (37). By describing the Quilt as a "grid," Weinberg implicitly ascribes to the artifact a controlling logic, a unified design--what in quilting parlance is termed a patchwork sampler. This design pattern, however, does not direct the flow of spectators in a single stream of traffic. This is so because, unlike a Drunkard's Path or Double Wedding Band pattern in which the individual panel blocks work together to create a unified design across the surface of the quilt, a patchwork sampler is constituted by a series of single panel blocks, each with a unique design, history, and logic. As a result, patrons' movements are guided by associations and punctuated by pauses, interruptions, and abrupt changes in course. The randomness of engagement is further enabled by the muslin walkways which visually separate the panels, marking each as distinct and disallowing any sense of continuity (narrative, spatial) among them. The routes which visitors of the Quilt traverse thus are transitory and ephemeral, simultaneously charted and erased in the moment of passing by. The second characteristic of schizophrenic spectators is the presence of auditory hallucinations. Cadoret defines these hallucinations as "the perception of auditory stimuli, or sounds, where none are externally present . . . . The voices . . . may repeat his [sic] thoughts or actions, argue with him [sic], or threaten, scold, or cure him [sic]" (481). Auditory hallucinations can lead the schizophrenic to believe that s/he is under constant surveillance or can cause the schizophrenic to slip further into a self-contained, isolated world of delusion. That the Quilt is made up of "a myriad of individual voices" (Elsley 192) is immediately apparent in the number of individuals who have taken part in its construction and display. With each quilt panel, spectators are confronted with multiple voices--the person who has died, the person(s) who made the block, the person(s) who stitched the block to others for a specific display, and so on. Moreover, the Quilt places these "individual voices . . . in the context of community" (Elsley 191). For Quilt spectators, then, memories of a life lived coexist with grief over a life cut short, anger at institutional apathy and systemic homophobia, faith in the import of remembering those who have died, and so on. Each of these voices vie for the spectator's attention, facilitating a gaze that is dynamic, multidirectional, mobile. Because the gaze is not fixed, the Quilt cannot convey a solitary truth claim to its viewers; rather, spectators must immerse themselves within the delusion and confusion of voices, imposing some sense of order on their own viewing experiences. Given that persons with AIDS continue to be marginalized within American culture, my use of the schizophrenic spectator to trace the reception dynamic of Quilt exhibits might appear to perpetuate, rather than unsettle, dominant ideological formations. Of course, this is the critical conundrum at the center of all investigations into subject formation: that is, "how to take an oppositional relation to power that is, admittedly, implicated in the very power one opposes" (Butler 17). Despite the potential pitfalls, I nonetheless use the trope of schizophrenia precisely because it recognizes the ways in which Quilt spectators, persons with AIDS, and persons who have died of AIDS-related illnesses are divested of the power and authority to speak even before they begin speaking. Furthermore, because the schizophrenic subject is founded on ever-shifting affinities (in time, across space), the position enables spectators to chart alternative lines of relation among institutional practices, ideological formations, and individual experiences, thus potentially mobilizing and sustaining a shared political program. It is on these twin goals of pedagogy and polemics that the NAMES Project originally was founded, and it is to these goals that we now must return. References Butler, Judith. The Psychic Life of Power: Theories in Subjection. Stanford: Stanford UP, 1997. Cadoret, Remi J. "Schizophrenia." Collier's Encyclopedia. Vol. 20. Eds. Lauren S. Bahr, et. al. New York: Collier's, 1997. 480-482. Elsley, Judy. "The Rhetoric of the NAMES Project AIDS Quilt: Reading the Text(ile)." AIDS: The Literary Response. Ed. Emmanuel S. Nelson. New York: Twayne, 1992. 187-196. Foucault, Michel. The History of Sexuality, Volume 1: An Introduction. Trans. Robert Hurley. New York: Vintage, 1990. Gentry, Jerry. "The NAMES Project: A Catharsis of Grief." The Christian CENTURY 23 May 1989: 550-551. Hawkins, Peter S. "Naming Names: The Art of Memory and the NAMES Project AIDS Quilt." Critical Inquiry 19(Summer 1993): 752-779. Weinberg, Jonathan. "The Quilt: Activism and Remembrance." Art in America 80(Dec. 1992): 37, 39.
APA, Harvard, Vancouver, ISO, and other styles
We offer discounts on all premium plans for authors whose works are included in thematic literature selections. Contact us to get a unique promo code!

To the bibliography